EASTERN ENVIRONMENTAL RADIATION FACILITY

    RADIOCHEMISTRY PROCEDURES MANUAL
         Conplled and Edited by
            Robert Lieberman
                June  1984
  U.S. Environmental Protection Agency
      Office of Radiation Programs
Eastern Environmental Radiation Facility
              P.O.  Box  3009
          Montgomery, AL  36193
            EPA 520/5-84-006

-------

-------
TECHNICAL REPORT DATA
(Pleat rtad Inttrucrions on the reverse btfort completing)
1 REPORT Nn
F-PA s?n/s-8•». 4-771   oncviou* COITION 11 O«§OL«T«

-------
                                 FOREWORD

     The Eastern Environmental Radiation Facility (EERF) in Montgomery,
Alabama, is a field laboratory operated by the Office of Radiation
Programs of the United States Environmental Protection Agency.  Prior to
December 2, 1970, the EERF was known as the Southeastern Radiological
Health Laboratory and operated by the United States Public Health
Service.  This manual is the first publication of radiochemical procedures
used at the EERF since the 1965 publication by the Public Health Service
of Procedures for Determination of Stable Elements and Radionuclides in
Environmental Samples (Public Health Service Publication No. 999-RH-10).
Due to the time elapsed since last publication and the EERF's changes in
direction since its incorporation into the Environmental Protection
Agency, a comprehensive manual of analytical procedures used is overdue.
Beyond documentation, our purpose in publishing the manual is to provide a
means of exchanging information with other laboratories and with other
individuals, groups, and organizations working with the Environmental
Protection Agency.
     Although other procedures exist for some of the analyses addressed in
this manual, those procedures that we have chosen to publish are those
that we know to be most appropriate and effective for ambient and
environmental levels and, generally, for our needs here at the EERF.  All
of the procedures in the manual have been exposed to rigorous intra- and
interlaboratory analytical quality control, and we have strong confidence
in the results that will be obtained using them.  Many of the procedures
have been published elsewhere and we make no claim to originality
regarding them.  However, we have tried to write and present the
procedures clearly in order to make them useable by the greatest number of
technically competent persons.  Finally, by way of assurance, all those
procedures included in this manual that are associated with EPA standards
requiring analysis of radionuclides are certified EPA alternate procedures.
                                    ii

-------
     The manual reflects the careful efforts of many people over nearly
twenty years of work.  I would like to acknowledge all  of their
contributions.  Robert Lleberman deserves special recognition for his
labor over a long period of time In assembling these procedures and
working toward an accurate and consistent presentation of them.
     Especially since the material In this manual will  be periodically
updated, we would like to Invite and encourage comments, suggestions, and
discussion of the procedures.  Remarks should be addressed to the
Director, Eastern Environmental Radiation Facility, P.  0. Box 3009,
Montgomery, Alabama, 36193.
                                        Charles R. Porter, Director
                                  Eastern Environmental  Radiation Facility
Montgomery, Alabama
June 1984
                                    Hi

-------
                                 PREFACE

     This manual provides a convenient and accurate reference for the
determination of pertinent radlonuclldes and stable elements in
environmental and bioassay samples.   All of the described procedures have
been used routinely in the analysis  of many samples.  In addition to the
chemical procedures, sections have also been included on radioactivity
counting, standardization, and quality control.
     Periodically, the manual will be updated and corrected with new
procedures and sections added.  The  page numbering system, which is
similar to that of the HASL-300 Procedures Manual, has this end in mind.
Each division in this manual has been given a letter.  The first pair of
digits with each letter represents sections of a division and the last
pair of numbers is the pages within  the section.  In Division C on
Chemical Procedures, the element symbol precedes any numbers, the first
pair of numbers is the specific procedure for that element, and the second
pair is used for the page number.  Thus, C-Am-01-01 is page 1 of the first
procedure for americium.
     Certain sequential and multielement analyses will be found at the end
of the division under C-00-01, etc.
                                   A-01

-------
                            TABLE OF CONTENTS

A.   General
     A-01  Preface
     A-03  Table of  Contents

B.   General  Analytical  Chemistry
     B-01  Quality Assurance  Program
     B-02  Instrumentation
     B-03  Preparation of Standards for  Instrument Calibration

C.   Chemical Procedures
     Am-01     Radiochemical Determination of Americium-241 in Ashed
               Samples Including  Soil,  Fly Ash, Ores, Vegetation and Biota
     C-01  Radiochemical  Determination of Carbon-14 in Aqueous Samples
     H-01  Radiochemical  Determination of Tritium in Milk, Soil, Urine,
          Vegetation and Other Biological Samples:  Azeotropic Method
     H-02  Radiochemical  Determination of Tritium in Water:  Dioxane Method
     H-03  Radiochemical  Determination of Tritium in Water Samples:
          Emulsion  Method
     1-01  Radiochemical  Determination of Iodine-131 in Drinking Water
     1-02  Radiochemical  Determination of Iodine-131 in Milk
     Kr-01     Radiochemical Determination of Krypton-85 in Environmental
               Air Samples
     P-01  Radiochemical  Determination of Phosphorus-32 in Fish Muscle
     P-02 Colorimetric Determination of Stable  Phosphorus in Biological
          Samples
     Pb-01     Radiochemical Determination of Lead-210 in Water and Solid
               Samples
     Pm-01     Radiochenical Determination of Promethium-147 in Aqueous
               and Urine Samples
     Pm-02     Radiochemical Determination of Promethium-147 in Feces Ash:
               Rapid Method
Preceding page blank

-------
                  TABLE OF CONTENTS   (Continued)

Pu-01  Radiochenrical Determination of Plutonium in Ashed Samples,
       Soil, Coal, Fly Ash, Ores, Vegetation, Biota and Water
Pu-02  Preparation of Plutonium-236 Tracer Solution
Ra-01  Radiochemical Determination of Radium-226 in Solid Samples
       Requiring Fusion
Ra-02  Radiochemical Determination of Radium-226 in Urine
Ra-03  Radiochemical Determination of Radium-226 in Water Samples
Ra-04  Radiochemical Determination of Radium-226, Deemanation Procedure
Ra-05  Radiochemical Determination of Radium-228 in Water Samples
Sr-01  Radiochemical Determination of Radiostrontium in Food Ash and
       other Solid Samples
Sr-02  Radiochemical Determination of Radiostrontium in Milk
Sr-03  Radiochemical Determination of Strontium-90 in Urine
Sr-04  Radiochemical Determination of Radiostrontium in Water, Sea
       Water and other Aqueous Media
Th-01  Preparation of Thorium-234 Tracer  Solution
U-01   Preparation of Uranium-232 Tracer  Solution
00-01  Radiochemical Determination of Gross Alpha and Gross Beta
       Particle Activity in Water
00-02  Radiochemical Determination of Gross Alpha Activity in Drinking
       Water by Coprecipitation
00-03  Radiochemical Determination of Lead-210 and Polonium-210 in Dry
       Inorganic and Biological Samples
00-04  Radiochemical Determination of Plutonium, Thorium and Uranium
       in Air Filters
00-05  Radiochemical Determination of Thorium and Uranium in Ashed
       Samples Including Soil, Coal,  Fly  Ash, Ores, Vegetation and
       Biota:  Fusion Method
00-06  Radiochemical Determination of Thorium and Uranium in Ashed
       Samples:  Nonfusion Method
00-07  Radiochemical Determination of Thorium and Uranium in Water
                               A-04

-------
                         QUALITY  ASSURANCE PROGRAM

                               Introduction

     The quality assurance program 1s a separate entity  at the  Eastern
Environmental Radiation Facility (EERF), removed organizationally  from  the
functional groups It serves, the Monitoring  and Analytical  Services  Branch
and the Environmental Studies Branch.  The main purpose  of the  EERF
quality assurance program is to establish limits of acceptable
radioanalytical results and to assure that analytical  results stay within
these error limits.  When analytical results deviate from established
limits, appropriate laboratory personnel determine the cause and take
immediate remedial action.  The need for a quality assurance program is
underscored by the fact that established limits are not  fixed.  They
change as new technologies and procedures develop.

                  Program Functions and Responsibilities

Preparation of Standard Radioactive Sources  and Solutions
     Quality assurance personnel, coordinating with counting room
personnel, stock appropriate radioactive standards and prepare  the
standards in various counting geometries for instrument  calibration.  The
primary source of radioactive standards is the Environmental Protection
Agency (EPA) National Quality Assurance Program at the Environmental
Monitoring and Support Laboratory, Las Vegas, Nevada (EMSL-LV).  Other
sources include the National Bureau of Standards (NBS) and commercial
suppliers of certified standards.  Table 1 describes the standards
required for each type of radloassay and the minimum frequency  of  each
calibration.  Table 2 lists the nominal radioactivities  for these
calibration standards.

     Counting room personnel calibrate the instruments and perform the
                                  B-01-1

-------
stability checks, and quality assurance personnel  verify  the  results of
the checks for specified performance.   The Environmental  Studies Branch
calibrates and maintains the field measurement and sampling equipment, and
quality assurance personnel supply the appropriate standards  as required.
(Table 3 lists the types of field equipment used at the EERF  and their
calibration frequencies.)  In addition, quality assurance personnel
prepare solutions containing known quantities of various  radlolsotopes as
needed by analytical personnel to validate or modify radlochemical
procedures.

Intrafacility Cross-Check Program
     Four types of samples are analyzed in the EERF cross-check analysis
program.  Routinely, every tenth sample through the laboratory is analyzed
in duplicate.  In addition, each week a 'spiked1 sample and a 'blind1
sample are analyzed.  A spiked sample Is one which has not been previously
analyzed and which has had added to it a measured quantity of at least one
radioisotope that is routinely analyzed at the laboratory.  A blind sample
is a sample of material that has been previously analyzed but whose
identity is unknown by the analyst at the time of reanalysis. Finally,
the cross-check program includes periodic analyses of samples to determine
background levels of radloisotopes.  Table 4 outlines the intrafacility
cross-check program.  The Computer Services Section maintains all data
generated from this program in the central data repository.

Interlaboratory Cross-Check Program
     Quality assurance personnel participate In three interlaboratory
programs.  The first and most comprehensive program Is the EPA National
Quality Assurance Program at the Environmental Monitoring and Support
Laboratory, Las Vegas, Nevada (EMSL-LV).  Tables 5 and 6  describe the
EMSL-Las Vegas cross-check program.  Table 5 lists the available
cross-check samples, and Table 6 shows the distribution  schedule.
"Environmental Radioactivity Laboratory Intercomparlson  Studies Program",
1978-1979, (EPA 600/473-032) describes this program 1n further detail.
                                  B-01-2

-------
     The second interlaboratory  program in which EERF  quality assurance
personnel participate is the intercomparison analysis  studies conducted  by
the World Health Organization (WHO)  and the International  Atomic  Energy
Agency (IAEA).  Participation in these studies is limited  to the
analytical disciplines represented at the EERF.   During the year,  the  EERF
receives four or five samples consisting of specific radioisotopes in
various materials.
     Finally, the EERF participates fn periodic  Intercomparison analysts
studies.  These studies are usually brief and involve  specific
radioisotopes in a particular sample medium.  Such analyses are usually
done by specific request to the  EERF.  Requests  originate  from other
government agencies and, on occasion, from professionals In the private
sector.
     In addition to the above three programs, the EERF, on an as-needed
basis, utilizes reference materials made available by  other agencies.  The
NBS, WHO, IAEA, and EMLS-LV, for example, often  make  reference materials
available.  EERF quality assurance personnel procure  these materials
whenever lab personnel determine a reference need.

Data Storage
     The Computer Services Section stores all data pertaining to  the
quality assurance program.  The  kinds of data that are stored  include  the
following:
     -all intrafacility and interfacility comparison  analyses  results
      with related performance
     -all data related to reagent blanks, Instrument  backgrounds, chemical
      recoveries, Instrument counting efficiencies, and instrument
      calibration
     -all replicate sample analyses results

Analytical Performance Review
     Quality  assurance personnel continuously review all data  relating to
                                  B-01-3

-------
the radioanalytical performance of the  EERF.   When  they find variances
from control limits, they notify supervisory  personnel who review all
pertinent data and procedures.   If necessary, the laboratory tests
procedures to identify causes for the variances.  Subsequently, quality
assurance personnel institute modifications,  if necessary, to assure that
similar variances will not recur.  Pvery two  years  the EERF publishes a
report that reviews and discusses results of  its quality assurance program
(ORP/EERF-79-2).

                   Support Functions  By Other EERF Staff

     To be successful, the quality assurance  program requires the support
and cooperation of personnel in other units of the  laboratory.  These
support tasks and responsibilities, according to personnel category,
include the following:

     -Counting room personnel conduct daily stability checks and frequent
      background counts and calibrate all instruments.  Proper  records of
      these checks are maintained in the counting room.
     -Analytical chemistry personnel repeat the analysis of one sample for
      every 10 samples analyzed (replicate analyses) and analyze at  least
      one reagent blank for every 20 samples  analyzed.  They maintain the
      established procedure for sample  identification.  All radiochemical
      methods are used by facility personnel  as they appear in  the manual.
      Personnel conduct all radiochemical procedures as documented and
      modifications to the procedures are not permitted without approval by
      the laboratory director and notification of quality  assurance
      personnel.  Computations are monitored  for accuracy  by spotchecks.
     -Computer services personnel periodically review the  accuracy of
      electronically computed results,  evaluate results for proper error
      terms, maintain the state-of-the-art methodology for analytical
      computations consistent with available  computer capabilities,  and
                                  B-01-4

-------
      maintain the central  data repository.
References
1.  Kanipe, L.G., Handbook for Analytical  Quality Control  and
    Radioanalytical Laboratories,  EPA-600/7-77-088,  August 1977.
2.  Blanchard, R., Broadway, J. and Moore, J., The Eastern Environmental
    Radiation Facility's Participation in Interlaboratory  and
    Intralaboratory Comparisons of Environmental  Sample Analyses:   1979
    and 1980, EPA 520/5-82-012, January 1982.
                                  B-01-5

-------
                                                          TABLE 1

                         Description of Required Radioassay Standards and Calibration Frequencies

Gamma Ray
Systems
Beta Particle
Systems
Alpha Particle
Systems
Liquid
Scintillation
Radon
Emanation
  Standards
   required
DO

O
CTl
standard
radioisotope
solutions (1-liter
and 3.5-liter
predetermined weights
of strontium carbonate
and yttrium oxalate
precipitates with known
                Marinelli  beakers)   amounts of °9Sr,  90Sr,
                                    anH 90V
                    and
specific isotope analysis:
standard solutions of
238-234y an(| 239pu
on planchets

gross alpha analysis:
standard uranium solutions
and self-absorption
standards
radiation
standards in
aqueous
solutions
standard
226Ra
solutions
  Calibration   annually
   frequency
                    quarterly
                          monthly (for specific
                          Isotope analysis)
  3H  (biannually)  annually
222Rn (biannually)
 14C  (annually)
       NOTE:   Table 2 lists the nominal  radioactivities for calibration  standards.

-------
                                                          TABLE 2


                         Nominal Activities  of  Radlonucllde Standards for Gamma Ray Efficiencies
CO
I
o

I
~o

dpm/ sample
Cylindrical Nal Crystal*
Rad1o1sotope
40K
51Cr
54Mn
58Co
59Fe
60Co
65Zn
95zr/95Nb
106Ru
HOmAg
124Sb
ISlj
134Cs
400 ml
50 g KC1**
1 x 105
5 x 10*
5 x 104
1 x 105
7 x 10*
1 x 105
3 x 104
1 x 105
5 x 104
5 x 104
1 x 105
5 x 104
1 liter
100 g KC1
1 x 105
5 x 104
5 x 104
1 x 105
7 x 104
1 x 105
3 x 104
1 x 105
5 x 104
5 x 104
1 x 105
5 x 104
3.5 liter
200 g KC1
1 x 105
5 x 104
5 x 104
1 x 105
1 x 104
2 x 105
6 x 104
1 x 105
5 x 104
5 x 104
1 x 105
5 x 104
Nal Crystal
40, 85 ml
20 g K2C03***
1 x 105
5 x 104
5 x 104
1 x 105
7 x 104
1 x 105
3 x 104
1 x 105
5 x 104
5 x 104
1 x 105
5 x 104

40, 85 ml
20 g K2C03
1 x 105
5 x 104
5 x 104
1 x 105
7 x 104
1 x 105
3 x 104
1 x 105
5 x 104
5 x 104
1 x 105
5 x 104
Ge(Li)
400 ml
50 g KC1
1 x 105
5 x 104
5 x 104
1 x 105
7 x 104
1 x 10s
3 x 104
1 x 105
5 x 104
5 x 104
1 x 105
5 x 104

-------
                                                          TABLE 2—Continued
                                Nominal  Activities  of  Radionuclide  Standards  for Gamma Ray Efficiencies
CO
I
o
03

dpm/sample
Cylindrical Nal Crystal*
Radioisotope
137QS
140ga/140L^
144Ce/144pr
226Ra
232Tn
400 ml
5 x 104
3 x 104
3 x 105
1 x 105
4 x 104
1 liter
5 x 104
3 x 104
3 x 105
1 x 105
4 x 104
3.5
5 x
3 x
3 x
1 x
4 x
liter
104
104
105
105
104
Nal Crystal
40, 85 ml
5 x 104
3 x 104
3 x 105
1 x 105
4 x 104

40, 85 ml
5 x 104
3 x 104
3 x 105
1 x 105
4 x 104
Ge(Li)
400 ml
5 x 104
3 x 104
3 x 105
1 x 105
4 x 104
         *  Crystal is 10 cm diameter and 10 cm in height.
         ** There are 966 dpm 4°K per gram of KC1  that yield 106  (11  percent)  1.46 MeV photons/min.
         ***There are 1043 dpm 40K per gram of 1(3  C03 that yield  115  (11  percent) 1.46 MeV photons/min.
         NOTE:  Nominal activities are those that  are sufficient  to accumulate enough counts  in a short period of time
    without excessive instrument dead time.

-------
                                 TABLE 3
                      Calibration of Field Equipment
          Type of Equipment                        Calibration Frequency

Air monitoring calibration equipment                Annually
Air pumps for ERAMS stations                        Prior to  shipment  and
                                                    annually  thereafter
Thermoluminescenee dosimeters (TLD's)               Annually
Pressurized ionization chambers (PIC's)             Annually
                                  TABLE 4
                     Intrafacility Comparison Program
    Radioisotope               Sample Media*               Analysis

Selected gamma-ray          water, milk, solids       Nal, Ge(Li) or both
emi tters
89Sr, 90Sr, or both         water, milk, solids       specific analyses or
                                                      gross beta
Selected actinides          water, milk, solids       specific analyses or
                                                      gross alpha
222Rn                       water                     specific analyses
226Ra                       water, solids             specific analyses
   3H                        water, milk               specific analyses
  14c                        milk                      specific analyses

      *   The prepared  samples  are rotated randomly to provide at least one
 intercomparison  per week.   These intercomparisons could either be previously
 analyzed samples for  which  contents  are known or specially prepared spiked
 samples.
                                   B-01-9

-------
                TABLE 5



Summary of EMSL-LV Cross-Check Programs

Sample
Milk
Water
a, Gross
o alpha
r beta*
0
Ganma
3H
239Pu*
Ra
Analysis
89Sr, 90Sr> 131I§
137C;, 140ja> K
Gross alpha, beta.
60co, 106Ru,
1 ^A 1 ^7 5 1
wS 9 V*Sj l/lj
3H
239Pu
226Ra> 228Ra
Activity
Per Isotope
< 200 pCi/ liter
< 100 pC1/liter
< 500 pCi /liter
< 3500 pCi/liter
< 10 pCi/liter
< 20 pCi /liter
Quantity
Supplied
- 4 liters
" 4 liters
~ 4 liters
- 50 ml
~ 4 liters
" 4 liters
Preservative Distribution
Formalin Quarterly
0.5M HN03 Bimonthly
0.5M HN03 Bimonthly
none Bimonthly
0.5M HN03 Semi annually
0.5M HN03 Quarterly
Time for
Analysis
and Report
6 weeks
4 weeks
4 weeks
4 weeks
8 weeks
8 weeks

-------
                                                  TABLE  5-Continued
                                        Summary of EMSL-LV Cross-Check Programs
Sample Analysis
Sr 89Sr, 90Sr
Blind Any Combination of
CO
o 	 	
L Air Filter Gross aloha beta*
90Sr, 13?Cs
Soil* 238pu 239pu
ZfflS; 230^, 232Th
Diet 89crj 90cr, 131!
137Cs, 140Ba> K
Activity Quantity
Per Isotope Supplied Preservative
< 50 pCi/liter " 4 liters 0.5M HN03
< 200 pCi/liter " 4 liters 0.5M HN03
< 200 pCi/sample 3 - 5 cm. dia. none
air filters
< 50 pCi /sample "35 grams none
< 50 pCi /sample 2 - 4-liter Formalin
samples
Time for
Analysis
Distribution and Report
Tri annually 8 weeks
Semiannually 10 weeks
Quarterly 6 weeks
Semiannually 8 weeks
Tri annually 8 weeks
*  Laboratories must have the necessary licenses  before  receiving these samples.

-------
                                                            TABLE 6

                                        EMSL-LV  Cross-Check  Sample  Distribution  Schedule

                                              (Numbers  indicate week  of  the month)
    Month
                    Water
00
I
o
    Oct
    Nov
    Dec
    Jan
    Feb
    Mar
           gamma
Gross alpha
   beta
226Ra             89Sr
228Ra    239Pu    90Sr   Blind*
Milk
Food
  Sr      Sr
gamma   gamma
Air Filter    Soil
        Gross alpha,
        beta, 137Cs,
        89Sr
               Pu,
               Th
    Apr

-------
                                                     TABLE 6--Continued
                                      EMSL-LV Cross-Check Sample Distribution Schedule
                                            (Numbers indicate week of the month)

Month
Gross alpha
gamma beta
00
o
L May 3
to
Jun 1
Water
226Ra 89$r
3H 228Ra 239Pu 90Sr Blind*

1
2 3
Milk Food Air Filter
Gross aloha,
Sr Sr Jjgta, Cs,
gamma gamma "'Sr


4
Soil
Pu,
Th

2***

Jul
Aug
Sep
1
     *  Performance sample for the Water Supply Laboratory Certification Program.
     ** Thorium analysis only.
     ***Plutonium analysis only.

-------
                             INSTRUMENTATION

                 Beta Particle Counting - Low Background

Instrumentation
     The beta counters are  of the  low-background, multiple-detector type
with one or more sample  detectors  per unit.  Steel or lead shielding is
used to attenuate external  gamma radiation.  Guard detectors operating in
anti-coincidence with the sample detectors  reduce the background
contribution due to cosmic  interactions.  The  sample detectors are
gas-flow, window-type Geiger counters,  approximately 5 cm in diameter.
The counting gas is a mixture of 99.05  percent helium and 0.95 percent
isobutane.  The beta counters are  equipped  with preset timers.  AIT
samples are placed in 5  cm diameter stainless  steel planchets for counting.

Operating Voltage
     The voltage on the  detector necessary  for proper operation is
determined by running the "plateau curve" of count rate  versus high
voltage.  The correct operating voltage is  selected in one of the
following two ways:
     1.  The Initial operating  voltage.
         A.  With check  source  of  known value  1n place,  Increasingly
             higher voltage Is  applied  to the  detector until it begins to
             count.
         B.  At the point where it begins to count, a one minute count is
             recorded.
         C.  The voltage is increased an integral amount that is
             convenient such as 20 or 50 volts.
         D.  Another one minute count is recorded.
         E.  Steps C and D are  repeated until  two consecutive readings are
             obtained that lie  within the same two sigma region.  The
             proper operating voltage is the higher voltage of these two
             points.
                                  B-02-1

-------
         F.  Eleven one minute counts are made to determine  whether  all
             counts do lie within the two sigma area.
         G.  If more than one count lies outside the two sigma  area, the
             operating voltage is biased in the opposite direction of the
             outliers.  (Lower if high and higher if low).
         H.  In this event the check source is recounted at  the new
             operating voltage for eleven one minute counts  to  determine
             whether these eleven points lie Within the two  sigma area.
     2.  The monthly check of the operating voltages for detectors in
     operation:
         A.  With check source in place a one minute count is recorded.
         B.  The operating voltage is lowered by the normal  metering
             increment for that instrument and another  one minute count is
             recorded.
         C.  This procedure is continued until the count rate of the check
             source falls below the two sigma area.
         D.  This procedure indicates that the instrument is functioning
             properly and the operating voltage is then reset to the
             second voltage increment into the two sigma region.
         E.  The check of the operating voltage is completed by repeating
             IFand 1H above.
                                  WARNING
             Do not apply a voltage to a detector to make it go into a
         saturated discharge condition.  This causes two problems: (1) the
         60 gauge wire in the detector becomes oxidized, overheated, and
         possibly misshapen due to warping or sagging,  and (2)  the high
         voltage power supply becomes overloaded, which may  damage some of
         its components.

     The correct operating voltage should be determined at least once each
month, after the gas supply is changed, after any electronic maintenance,
or after any modification is made on a detector.  Any appreciable change
                                  B-02-2

-------
In the operating voltage,  plateau length,  or plateau  slope indicates
possible trouble in detector electronics or in  the counting gas.  It is
desirable not to interrupt the gas flow for any reason, but, if that is
not possible, as when the  counting gas is  changed on  a counter, purge the
detector for several hours before applying high voltage to the detectors
and guard.

Counting Efficiency
     Counting efficiency is the relationship between  sample disintegration
rate and sample counts recorded by the counter. Counting efficiency is
usually expressed as counts per disintegration  or as  the percentage of
disintegrations recorded as counts.  Counting efficiency may also be
expressed as the count rate per unit of radioactivity,  i.e., cpm per
pCi/1.
     Counting efficiency is determined by  placing a source with a known
disintegration rate or known radioactivity in the beta counter and
measuring its count rate.   This source is  referred to as a standard
source, and the process of determining the counting efficiency Is called
calibration.  Calibration should be performed for each radionuclide that
will be counted in the counter, and the standard sources should be of the
same physical form (size,  shape, chemical  composition, planchet material,
etc.) as the samples to be counted.  Gross beta calibration is performed
using a standard source of strontium-90 plus yttrium-90 in equilibrium.
The results of a gross beta determination  of a  sample is then reported as
activity equivalent to strontium-90 plus yttrium-90 in equilibrium.  (See
Standardization Section for preparation of standards.)
     Beta counters should  be calibrated every four to six months and after
mechanical modifications are made on a detector.  The daily operational
check procedure as outlined below serves also as a check on the relative
counting efficiency.
                                  B-02-3

-------
Background Determination
     The background counting rate of the  low-background beta counters Is
usually between 0.5 and 1.5 counts per minute.   It can vary from detector
to detector and from day to day.   The background for each detector should
be determined with an overnight measurement and  at the beginning of the
workday for the length of time that routine samples are counted (or
another specific time) and should be measured using a clean, empty
planchet in each counter.  Radon  fluctuations 1n the atmosphere will
affect the background count rate  of the beta detector.

Absorption Factor
     The beta counting efficiency Is determined  using an essentially
weightless standard source.  In many types of samples there Is a
sufficient amount of solids so that the sample partially shields Itself
and produces 'self-absorption1.  In this  case, the count rate obtained on
the sample Is not as great as It  should be and must be corrected for
self-absorption according to the  weight,  or more correctly the
                          2
'density-thickness' (mg/cm) of the sample.
     The absorption correction factors should be determined for the
specific radlonucllde being counted and for approximately the same
chemical composition as In the actual sample.  A curve of the absorption
correction factor versus sample weight or density-thickness can be
obtained by preparing a sample that contains equal concentrations of
radioactivity per unit weight of  solids and varying amounts of solids
(solids content should vary from  approximately zero solids to a weight
equal to the maximum weight expected In an actual sample).  Be sure that
the radioactivity Is uniformly distributed In the solid material.  The
count rate per unit weight of solids for  each sample 1s then divided by
the count rate of the weightless  sample,  and this fraction Is plotted as a
function of the sample weight.  It Is not necessary to use a calibrated
solution for this study since all values  are compared to the weightless
sample value.
                                  B-02-4

-------
Sample Handling
     All samples should be handled with care to prevent  accidental  loss of
the material in the planchet, contamination of the  counting  room, or
contamination of the beta counters.  All samples should  be kept covered
when not actually in a counter to keep dust from the samples.  Samples
whicli tend to be hygroscopic should be kept in a desiccator  until
counted.  Planchets that have material piled above  the top edge of  the
wall or have material on the outside of the planchet should  not be  placed
in the beta counters.  Some types of samples consist of  a precipitate on a
2.5-cm diameter filter.  The filter should always be in  the  center  of the
5 cm planchet when the planchet is being placed into the counter.   Care
should be exercised that the filter not warp or the use  of a metal  ring
may be necessary.

Counter Operation Check
     At the beginning of each workday, a standard check  source should be
counted to determine that the counter is operating  satisfactorily.  The
count obtained each day should be compared with the usual count of  the
check source "or that particular detector.  A count significantly higher
or lower than the usual value indicates detector or electronic malfunction
or insufficient counting-gas supply.  A graph of the daily check source
counts showing the acceptable limits of variation is desirable.

Sample Types and Counting Times
     Table 1 gives the types of samples counted for beta activity,
counting times, and general remarks pertinent to each sample type.

         Alpha particle Counting - Internal Proportional Counters

Instrumentation
     The alpha counters are the internal proportional gas-flow type and
are operated oh the alpha plateau in the proportional region.  The
                                  B-02-5

-------
counting gas is 'P-101, a mixture of 90  percent argon and 10 percent
methane.  The detectors are hemispherical with approximately 6.3 cm
diameters.  After insertion of each sample,  the detector must be purged
for approximately four minutes before the count is started.

Operating Voltage
     The plateau curves for the alpha counters are obtained in the manner
described in Part A above.  In addition, to  assure that the counter is on
the alpha plateau rather than the alpha  and  beta plateau, a beta standard
is counted in the chamber.  The voltage  on the detector is lowered until
it counts only alpha disintegrations and the alpha plateau curve is
obtained in this region.

Counting Efficiency
     The standards used to determine alpha counting efficiencies should
approximate the samples to be counted in physical size and backing
material.  Comments found in Part A apply.   Natural uranium (in
equilibrium) or a specific alpha emitter such as piutonium-239 may be used
as the calibration source.

Background Determination
     The background counting rate of the alpha counters varies from 0.03
to 0.20 count per minute, depending upon the particular counter.  Each
afternoon the plane het holder is cleaned and an overnight background is
obtained in each counter.  If the background exceeds the normal background
count, the chamber is decontaminated as  outlined below.

Self-Absorption Factor
     Because an alpha particle is readily  stopped in matter, the number
reaching the sensitive volume of the detector Is greatly reduced by
                                             /
self-absorption and scattering in the sample material.  To correct for
this, it is necessary to determine the self-absorption factors for alpha
                                  B-02-6

-------
counting.  Alpha self-absorption factors are determined In the  same  manner
as the beta self-absorption factors.   Samples are prepared containing
equal concentrations of alpha radioactivity per unit weight and varying
amounts of solids, and the count per unit weight 1s plotted as  a function
                                                       2
of the solids weight (ing) or 'density-thickness* (mg/cm ).   The samples
used to determine self-absorption should resemble the actual  samples as
much as possible In physical size, planchet material, and chemical
composition, and the alpha emitter should be the same as used to determine
alpha counting efficiency.
     As it is usually not practical  to prepare a 'weightless1 alpha  sample
in the laboratory, the self-absorption curve may be extrapolated to  find
the count rate at zero density-thickness.  If a standard solution 1s used
to prepare the self-absorption samples, the weightless sample counting
efficiency is determined from the extrapolated count rate at zero
density-thickness.  The self-absorption factors are computed by dividing
each count rate per unit weight by the extrapolated weightless  sample
count rate.  The self-absorption factors thus computed may be plotted as a
function of either total sample weight (mg) or density-thickness
      2
(mg/cm ) to obtain the self-absorption curve.

Sample Handling
     The comments as given for beta  counting apply here.

Counter Operation Check
     The same procedure is followed  here as outlined for beta counters.

Decontamination
     Because the alpha samples are placed Inside the detector,  an Internal
proportional detector may easily be  contaminated.   Approximately every six
months, or at any time the background increases above the level  normally
encountered, the detector should be  removed and thoroughly cleaned with
ethanol.  A brown film often appears on the walls of the  detector.   This
                                  B-02-7

-------
film should be removed by lightly rubbing with an abrasive.   Soap pads are
routinely used at this laboratory.  The manufacturer suggests the use of
an abrasive (HMC proportional counter manual).  The center wire  should be
cleaned by dipping in ethanol (with care not to bend it out  of its  normal
shape).  The accumulation of this deposit on the chamber walls leads to a
gradual deterioration in performance (generally observed as  an increasing
operating voltage, change in plateau slope,  and decreasing plateau
length).  A sudden deterioration in performance usually indicates
mechanical damage to the center wire or an accumulation of dust  or  debris
on the center wire.

Sample Types and Counting Times
     Table 2 gives.the types of samples counted for alpha activity,
counting times, and general remarks pertinent to each sample type.

                          Gamma Ray Spectroscopy

Sample Preparation
     All samples are usually gamma scanned for specific gamma ray-emitting
nuclides before they are processed, i.e., they are gamma scanned in the
'raw1 form as received at the laboratory.  The only preparation  required
is to make sure the sample is homogeneous and is in calibrated
configuration.  For solid media it is necessary to grind and blend  the
sample before counting.  Normally a 3.5- or 1.0-liter aliquot of the
homogeneous sample is placed in a clean, polyethylene, Marinelli-type
beaker and analyzed by gamma ray spectroscopy.

Instrumentation
     The gamma ray spectrometer consists of a detector, multichannel pulse
height analyzer, data read-out device, and auxiliary instrumentation.  The
detectors used here are 10 x 10 cm Nal(Tl) solid or 12.7 x 10 cm well
crystals coupled to photomultiplier tubes and enclosed in steel
                                  B-02-8

-------
cave-type shields.   The Marine!li-type beaker containing  the 3.5-liter
sample is placed over the detector inside of  the  shield.

Calibration
     Two types of calibration are required in gamma  ray spectroscopy:
gamma ray energy vs. channel number and gamma-counting efficiency.
Knowledge of the energy-channel  number relationship  permits qualitative
identification of specific gamma ray-emitting nuclides.  In  order to make
a quantitative determination of  the amount of a particular nuclide,  it  is
necessary to know the counting efficiency and the shape of the standard
spectrum for that nuclide.
     Gamma ray energy-channel number relationship.  The spectrometers are
used with two energy-channel number relationships.  For most of the
samples from routine programs, 200 channels of an analyzer are used  to
cover the energy range from 0 to 2 MeV, at 10 keV per channel.  The
spectrometers are aligned to the proper energy-channel number relationship
by counting several nuclides with gamma ray energies in the energy range
of interest (0 to 2 MeV) and plotting the location (channel  number)  of
each peak as a function of the known gamma ray energy.  Varying the  gain
of the amplifier in the analyzer changes the slope of this line and, in
effect, changes the energy-channel number relationship by a constant
factor (multiplier).  Increasing the gain by a factor of 2 changes  the
slope by a factor of 2 and changes the energy calibration by a factor of
2.  Thus, a peak which initially was located in channel number 10 would
now appear in channel number 20.  This relationship is true only if  the
plot of channel number versus gamma ray energy passes through the origin
(zero).  The threshold control changes the X-axis intercept and permits
one to adjust the spectrometer so that the line passes through the
origin.  Often  it will be necessary to adjust the threshold, .adjust  the
gain, readjust  the threshold, readjust the gain, and so forth, to  achieve
perfect calibration.
                                  B-02-9

-------
     Most multichannel analyzers exhibit some nonlinearity,  that Is,  a
plot of photon energy versus channel number will not result  In a perfectly
straight line.  This is most apparent in the lower energy portion of  the
spectrum (< 100 keV).  A procedure commonly used is to make    Co (1.332
MeV) and 137Cs (0.662 MeV) fall in channels 133.2 and 66.2 by adjusting
the gain and threshold controls.  The other nuclides are then counted and
the peak channels determined and plotted against energy.  A  list of
nuclides used for standardization is shown in Table 3.
     Gamma ray counting efficiency.  The counting efficiency and spectrum
shape must be determined for each of the nuclides that one desires to
measure quantitatively.  Counting efficiency is usually expressed in  units
of counts per minute in a selected spectral region per picocurie or counts
per minute per picocurie per liter.  A known amount of activity of a
particular nuclide is diluted to the desired volume with distilled water,
thoroughly mixed, placed in a Marine!li beaker, and counted.   This
standard solution should be counted for a sufficient length
of time to obtain a total count which will yield good counting
statistics.  A total count (in the spectral region of interest) of
approximately 10,000 counts is adequate if only the photopeak efficiency
is to be determined.
     Geometries in use at this laboratory are 3.5- and 1.0-  liter
Marinelli beakers and a 400-ml plastic container for use with the 10  x  10
cm solid crystals and 40- and 85-ml plastic vials for use with the
12.7 x 10 cm well crystal.
     (3)  To obtain standard spectra for the analyses of data, it is
necessary to prepare samples with standards of the radionuclides of
interest in the required geometries.  It is desirable but not always
practical to duplicate as closely as possible the sample density with the
standards.   These spectra should contain statistically sufficient net
counts in each region of interest upon which to base the interference
coefficients and photopeak efficiencies.  Table 4 presents typical
photopeak efficiencies for the three geometries in use at this laboratory.
                                  B-02-10

-------
Routine Counting Procedure
     (1)  At the beginning of each workday,  small  cesium-137  and cobalt-60
standards (point sources) are counted for 5  minutes  in  a  uniform
geometry.  From the location of the peaks,  the energy alignment of the
spectrometer is checked and adjusted, if necessary.   A  check  on counting
efficiency is obtained by comparing the counts in  selected  spectral
regions to the usual counts for these sources.  A  plot  of these daily
counts on a control chart as a function of data will  indicate sudden
degradation in counting efficiency as well as long-term changes in
efficiency, if such should occur.   Radioactive decay of the standards
must, of course, be taken into consideration.  This  daily procedure also
checks out the operation of the complete spectrometer system, including
the data read-out device.
     (2)  After checking the energy alignment and  counting  efficiency of
the spectrometer system, a background count is made  on  each detector using
a sample of distilled water having the same geometry as the samples to be
counted.  The background should be counted for the same length of time as
the samples or, preferably, longer.
     If the background is to be subtracted automatically  by the
spectrometer, the background data should be stored in the spectrometer  in
the subtract mode.  If background is not to be automatically subtracted,
the background is stored in the add mode, printed  out,  and  erased from
analyzer memory.  The background must be scrutinized to determine that  it
is normal and that there is no evidence of contamination  of the detector
or shield.
     (3)  The beaker containing the sample is placed in position  and
counted for an appropriate length of time.  A 50-minute counting  time  is
normally used.

Analysis of Spectral Data
     The analysis of the spectral data obtained from the gamma ray
spectrometer  is an  important and usually the most complicated aspect  of
                                  B-02-11

-------
the use of this instrument to measure radionuclide  concentrations.   If one
is interested in only a qualitative determination of  the radionuclides in
a sample, i.e., identification of the gamma ray emitters, then the
location of the peaks in the spectrum is of primary interest.  If one
desires to determine the amount of a particular nuclide in the sample,
then the location of the peaks, the number of counts  in the peaks,  and the
interference of one peak with another all must be considered.  A number of
methods have been used for analyzing gamma ray spectral data.  Two  of
these methods in general use are described below.   Both are suitable for
use with a desk calculator.
     Stripping method.  In this method, the spectrum  of each radionuclide
is successively stripped from the composite spectrum  of the sample.
Beginning with the nuclide having the highest energy  photopeak,  the
amount of this nuclide is first determined.  The standard spectrum  of this
nuclide is then normalized to the high energy photopeak in the sample
spectrum and the normalized standard spectrum is subtracted channel  by
channel from the sample spectrum.  Having removed the spectrum of the
highest energy gamma ray-emitter from the composite spectrum, the next
highest gamma energy photopeak is selected, the amount of radioactivity
determined, the standard spectrum for this radionuclide normalized  to the
sample spectrum, and the spectrum of this radionuclide stripped  from the
composite spectrum.  This  procedure  is continued until all  identifiable
radionuclides present in the sample have been quantitized.   It should be
noted that the stripping method is most useful in  the case when  only a few
gamma ray-emitting nuclides are present in the sample. Also,  if there  is
direct interference between the photopeaks of different nuclides, the
stripping method becomes somewhat inaccurate.  A further disadvantage  is
that if a particular nuclide has more than one gamma  ray, usually the
highest energy gamma ray must be used as the normalizer and,  in  some
cases, the photopeak from  this gamma ray may be extremely  low compared to
other peaks in the spectrum.  The errors associated with each  successive
                                  B-02-12

-------
'strip1  are cumulative, causing the error to be great  in the  lower energy
end of the spectrum.
    If only one gamma ray-emitting radionuclide is present  in the  sample,
the amount of the radionuclide may be determined directly from the net
count (gross count - background) in the selected photopeak  region.  The
same spectral region must be used in the sample spectrum as was used  in
the standard spectrum when counting efficiency was determined.
    If only three or four gamma ray-emitting nuclides  are present  in  the
sample and if their photopeaks are separated in energy,  a simplified
stripping procedure may be used.  The simplified procedure  consists of
subtracting the Compton spectrum of higher energy gamma  rays  from  the
photopeak of the lower energy gamma rays.  In most cases, the Compton
spectra are approximately straight lines in the regions  of  the lower
energy photopeaks, that is, the counts do not vary greatly  from one
channel to the next.  Thus, a straight line is drawn across the base  of the
photopeaks of interest and the counts above this baseline are taken as the
counts due to the nuclide of interest.  This procedure is applied  to  a net
spectrum, that is, after the background has been subtracted.   The
following formula describes the procedure:
     (Gross counts in                                  (Counts due
      spectral region  -  (Background  -  (Baseline  =  to  nuclide
      of interest)            counts)       counts)     of  interest)

     Matrix (simultaneous solution)-method.  The matrix  method is  similar
to the stripping method in that the interference of the  spectrum of one
nuclide with that of another is considered, but the interferences  are
subtracted simultaneously rather than successively, as in the stripping
method.  Interference in regions of energy higher than the  photopeak  are
considered as well as the interference in regions of lower  energy. Cases
of direct interference of photopeaks also can be handled by this method.
The paper by Kahn et al. (Ref. 2) and the U.S. Public Health  Service
training course manual Radionuclide Analysis by Gamma Spectroscopy
(Ref. 3) give a detailed discussion of this method.
                                  B-02-13

-------
     In general,  equations are set up  describing  the contribution of each
radionuclide to the counts in a selected  spectral  region of  interest.  The
number of equations corresponds to the number of  nucTides.   The
contributions of each nuclide to a given  spectral  region are determined
from the individual spectra of standard sources.   The set of equations is
then solved simultaneously.  Such simultaneous  solutions are most easily
performed by a computer when the number of  nuc1 ides (and hence the number
of equations) is more than two or three.  The  solutions of the set of
equations are then new equations that  give  the  count due to  each nuclide
of interest in terms of the observed counts in  each spectral region  and
constant factors.  In using these equations, the  net count is determined
(gross count - background) in each of  the selected spectral  regions  of the
sample spectrum, these values are inserted  into the equation, and the true
count due to each nuclide  is computed.  The counting efficiency factors
are then used to obtain the amount of  each  radionuclide  in the sample.
Inaccuracy may result if a nuclide is  present  in  the sample  but  is not
accounted for in the set of equations.
     A third method, the Least Squares Analysis,  necessitates the use of  a
computer.  This method is  described in the course manual Radionuclide
Analysis by Gamma Spectroscepy (Ref. 3).

                   Alpha Particle Scintillation Counting

     Radium-226  is determined at this laboratory by the  emanation
technique.  The  procedure  used to prepare and seal the sample  is  described
in Section C of  this manual.  After the sealed solution  has  been  stored
for the ingrowth of    Rn, the radon is drawn by vacuum and  flushed  by
nitrogen into a  ZnS-lined  scintillation cell.   The counting  system
consists of a photomultiplier tube (which interfaces the scintillation
cell), an electronic circuit which amplifies and shapes  the  photo-
multiplier signal, and an  electromechanical or electronic  sealer.
Since the levels of radium encountered in environmental  samples  are  very
                                  B-02-14

-------
low, long counting times are  necessary,  on  the order of 1000 minutes per
sample.
     The efficiency and background of each  chamber  is determined before
use with a sample.  The efficiency is determined  by introducing a known
amount of 222Rn gas into the  scintillation  cell and counting until a
statistically valid number is obtained.   The  chamber is then cleaned by
alternately evacuating and purging with  nitrogen.   When free of all
residual radon, the background of the chamber is  determined by a 1000
minutes count.
     The repetitive determination of backgrounds  and efficiencies serves
as a check on the operation of the system in  lieu of the  daily performance
tests recommended for the previously described systems.
References
1.  Kolde, H. E., Quality Control  of Radioactivity Counting Systems,
    Public Health Service Publication Ho.  99-RH-15 (August 1965).
2.  Kahn, Bernd, et al., Rapid Methods for Estimating  Fission Product
    Concentrations in Milk, U. S.  Department of Health,  Education,  and
    Welfare, Public Health Service Publication No. 99-R-2  p. 17,  (1963).
3.  Radlonucllde Analysis by Gamma Spectroscopy. Training  Branch  Division
    of Radiological Health, U. S.  Department of Health,  Education,  and
    Welfare, Public Health Service.
4.  Porter, C.R., Augustine, R.J., Matusek,  J.H., Jr., and Carter,  M.W.,
    Procedures for Determination of Stable Elements and  Radionuclides in
    Environmental Samples. U.S. Department of Health,  Education,  and
    Welfare, Public Health Service Publication Number  999-RH-10  (19G5).
5.  Phillips, C.R., Stewart, J.A., and Athey, T.W. Ill,  A  Computer  Program
    for the Analysis of Gamma-Ray Spectra  by the Method  of Least  Squares,
    U.S. Department of Health, Education,  and Welfare, Public Health
    Service Publication Number 999-RH-21 (1966).
                                  B-02-15

-------
                              TABLE 1
      Beta Particle Counting Sample Types and Counting Times

Sample Type
Yttrium oxalate
on 2.5-cm diam-
eter filter
(milk, water, food)
Nuclide
90Y
co^"9
50 min Place filter in center of
5 cm planchet. Count as
soon as possible to reduce
correction for 90y decay.
Strontium oxalate
(total strontium)
on 2.5-cm
diameter filter
(milk, water
food, biota,
silt and soil

Gross beta (5 cm)
on planchet
(vyater, food,
biota, silt, and
soi 1)
           50 min
and
90Sr
Gross
beta
20-50
min,
depend-
ing on
count
rate of
sample
Place filter in center of
5 cm planchet.  Count as
soon as possible to reduce
correction for 90y ingrowth
and 89$r decay. Count again
after 6-7 days to determine
90$r by differences.

Handle samples carefully to
avoid spilling contents.
                             B-02-16

-------
                             TABLE 2

     Alpha  Particle Counting Sample Types and Counting Times
 Sample Type           Huclide                        Remarks
Gross alpha f5-cm)     Gross      25-100   Handle planchet carefully
on planchet            alpha      nrin      to avoid spilling contents.
{water, food,
biota, silt,
and soil)

Total radium-          Total      100 mi n  Place filter in center of
barium chronate        radium             5 cm planchet.  Count as
on 2.5-cm                                 soon as possible to avoid
diameter filter                           correction for radium
(water, food,                             daughter ingrowth.
biota, silt,
and soil)
                             B-02-17

-------
                             TABLE 3
           Hud ides  Useful  for Calibrating Spectrometer

lluclide
57CO
144Ce
l«Ce
133Ba
13l!
140Ba-140La
103Ru_103Rh
106Ru_106Rh
137Cs
22Na
54Mn
65Zn
60Co
40K
Half-life*
270 d
285 d
32.5 d
10.5 y
8.04 d
12.80 d
39.35 d
368 d
30.17 y
2.60 y
313 d
244 d
5.27 y
1.277 x 109
Energy of principal
gamma rays (MeV)
0.123
0.134
0.142
0.360
0.364
0.637
0.487
0.537
1.596
0.498
0.513
0.662
0.510
1.277
0.840
1.119
1.173
1.46
Channel Mo.
10 keV/Channel
12.",
13.4
14.2
36.0
36.4
63.7
48.7
53.7
159.6
49.8
51.3
66.2
51.0
127.7
84.0
111.0
117.3
146.0
*  Half-life of parent nuclide.
                             B-02-18

-------
                                      TABLE 4

              Typical Efficiencies for a 10cm x 10cm Nal  (Tl)  Crystal

Radionuclide
l^Ce
131 j
106Ru
137Cs
95Zr_95Nb
54Mn
65Zn
60Co
40K
140Ba
140ga_140|_a
226Ra.214Bi
Energy
Band
MeV
0.09 -
0.33 -
0.47 -
0.62 -
0.71 -
0.80 -
1.06 -
1.27 -
1.40 -
0.45 -
1.53 -
1.69 -
0.13
0.39
0.55
0.70
0.79
0.88
1.18
1.39
1.52
0.53
1.67
1.83
Photopeak
Energy
MeV
.134
.366
.511
.662
.76
.84
1.11
1.332
1.46
0.49
1.60
1.76
3.5-1
0.012
0.048
0.0097
0.034
0.034
0.035
0.015
0.022
0.0023
0.036
0.020
0.0048
1.0-1
0.121
0.080
0.016
0.057
0.050
0.058
0.027
0.036
0.0038
0.058
0.032
0.0090
*Cottage
Cheese
Container
0.018
0.060
0.012
0.038
0.036
0.042
0.017
0.027
0.029
—
0.025
0.0068
     *  A round, plastic (four inch diameter)  container having  a 450 ml
capacity.

     NOTE:   The efficiency is defined for preselected  channels  spanning
the photopeak and is determined by the equation  E   =      net cpm
                                                      dpm  in the standard
                                      B-02-19

-------
            PREPARATION OF STANDARDS FOR INSTRUMENT CALIBRATION

      Preparation of Strontlum-90  and  Yttr1um-90 Secondary Standards

Principle
                                        qn       on
     In most procedures for  determining  wSr and 3UY, yttrium 1s
determined as the oxalate, and strontium either as the oxalate or
                                  9ft   90
carbonate.  A known quantity of a    Sr-  Y  primary standard Is mfxed
with a predetermined amount  of stable  strontium and yttrium carrier, and a
radiochemical separation is  made.   Strontium can also be precipitated as
nitrate in concentrated nitric acid solution, and yttrium can be
precipitated as the hydroxide.
     The preparation of pure standards of   .Sr and   Y fs of prime
concern rather than a quantitative recovery; however, the yield has been
generally over 95 percent.   Since  these standards are used for procedures
which require the addition of carriers,  self-absorption curves are
prepared.
     The amounts of strontium and  yttrium carrier used in the accompanying
procedures are approximately 10 mg each  of  yttrium and strontium.  Slight
changes in the amount of carrier would not  change the results.  Much
larger amounts of carrier have been used successfully with the necessary
procedural modification related to self-absorption.
     Since the principal  product in nitrate separation is strontium. It is
used to prepare the radiostrontlum standard.  The principal product in the
hydroxide separation is yttrium, and this Is used to prepare the
radioyttrlum standard.  Both procedures, however, are suitable for
preparing both strontium and yttrium standards.
     In the nitrate procedure, strontium is separated from yttrium by
precipitation In a concentrated nitric add solution.  This 1s a
separation method which has  been used  frequently in the past.  Both
strontium and yttrium nitrate carriers are  used and the separation process
is repeated several times to assure purity  of precipitate.  Although the
                                  B-03-1

-------
quantitative recovery of strontium Is  of  secondary Importance, a high
recovery is desirable.  Strontium nitrate 1s Insoluble in a 70 percent
nitric acid solution.  A 90 percent nitric acid solution permits the
addition of up to 10 ml of water and,  therefore, the use of carrier and
standard radlostrontium solutions without the need of evaporation.  Fresh
nitric acid should be used.  Older nitric acid solutions tend to
decompose, losing some of the nitric acid content, and thus reduce
recovery.  The purity of strontium standard is checked by following the
                                                  90   90
same nitrate precipitation procedure and  replacing  uSr-  Y with
                               90                  90   90
approximately 10 nanocuries of   Y separated from a   Sr-  Y
solution.  Since no radlostrontium is  present, any radioactivity in the
strontium precipitate would indicate an impure standard.
     The same technique is used to determine the purity of yttrium
  am
85
                      90    90
standard by replacing   Sr- Y with approximately 10 nanocuries of
  Sr.
     The hydroxide separation of strontium and yttrium is carried out
employing the difference in the solubilities of their hydroxides.  Both
strontium and yttrium carriers are  added  and yttrium hydroxide is
precipitated with ammonium hydroxide and  purified by multiple reprecip-
itations.  The recovery is over 95  percent.
     The determination of purity in this  procedure is the same as
described in the nitrate separation.   In  both cases the impurity is less
than 0.1 percent.
     The precipitation of yttrium and strontium as oxalates as well as the
strontium carbonate precipitation are established procedures.  Strontium
is precipitated as oxalate or carbonate in an ammoniacal solution by the
addition of ammonium oxalate or sodium carbonate.
     The precipitation, in most cases, is reasonably complete within a few
minutes, if it is cooled in an ice  bath.  Strontium oxalate precipitates
as SrCJD-.HgO.  Yttrium is precipitated  as oxalate in an oxalic
acid medium.  As in the case of strontium oxalate, the precipitation is
complete in a few minutes, if cooled in ?n ice bath.  Yttrium oxalate
precipitates as Y2(C204)3 • 9HgO.
                                  B-03-2

-------
Special Apparatus
1.   Metricel DM 800 membrane filters or equivalent, 25mm diameter,  0.8
     micrometer pore size.  See Note 1.
2.   Suction filter apparatus.
3.   Centrifuge, bench model.

Reagents
1.   Ammonium hydroxide, 15M.  Reagent grade NH.OH.
2.   Ammonium oxalate, saturated solution.  Dissolve 142 g of ammonium
     oxalate crystals in 500 ml of hot distilled water and dilute to 1
     liter with distilled water.
3.   Ethanol, 95 percent reagent.
4.   Nitric acid, fuming 90 percent.
5.   Nitric acid, 16M, 70 percent reagent.
6.   Nitric acid, 2M.  Dilute 125 ml of the 70 percent reagent grade
     HN03 to 1 liter with distilled water.
7.   Oxalic acid, 1M.  Dissolve 126 grams of crystalline oxalic acid
     reagent in 700 ml distilled water and dilute to 1 liter.
8.   Sodium carbonate, 1.5J1.  Dissolve 159 g of Na2C03 in 900 ml
     distilled water and dilute to 1 liter.
9.   Strontium carrier, 10 mg Sr+2/ml.  Dissolve 24.2 g Sr(N03)2 in
     900 ml distilled water.  Add 1 ml 16M HN03 and  dilute to 1 liter.
10.  Yttrium carrier, 10 mg Y+3/ml.  Heat (avoid boiling) 12.7 g of
     Y203 in 50 ml of 16M HN03 until dissolved.  Transfer to a 1
     liter volumetric flask and dilute to 900 ml. Adjust to pH2 with 15M
     NH4OH and dilute to 1 liter with distilled water.

Procedure - Nitrate Separation
Strontium-90 Oxalate or Carbonate
—~^-^—^——^———^~^                                 +2
     1.  Pipette 1 ml of strontium carrier (approximately 10 mg Sr  /ml)
         and 1 ml of yttrium carrier (approximately  10 mg Y  /ml) Into a
         centrifuge tube.  Add 1 ml of   Sr-  Y standard activity and
                                  B-03-3

-------
         dilute to approximately 10 nl with distilled water.
     2.   Add 30 ml  of fuming  nitric acid.  Cool with stirring in ice bath
         for 10-20 minutes, centrifuge, and decant the supernate
         containing yttrium into a beaker.  Record the time as the start
         of decay  of  yttrium.
     3.   Wash precipitate from step 2 with 3 ml of fuming nitric acid;
         centrifuge,  decant,  and discard the supernate.
     3a.  For strontium carbonate precipitate, wash precipitate from step 3
         with 3 ml  of fuming  nitric acid, centrifuge, decant, and discard
         the supernate.
     3b.  Dissolve  the precipitate in 10 ml of distilled water and add 3 ml
         of 15M ammonium hydroxide.
     3c.  Heat to near boiling in hot water bath and add 5 ml of l.SM^
         sodium carbonate and cool in ice bath.  Go to step 6 after
         precipitating strontium carbonate.
     4.   For strontium oxalate precipitate, proceed from step 3b to step 5.
     5.   Heat to near boiling on hot water bath, add 5 ml of ammonium
         oxalate,  and cool in ice bath.
     6.   Centrifuge,  discard  supernate.
     7.   Transfer  strontium carbonate or oxalate precipitate
         quantitatively onto  a pre-weighed membrane filter with three
         10 ml portions of water and wash with three 10 ml portions of
         cold alcohol.
     8.   Carefully mount the  filter in a 5 cm planchet, weigh, and count
         the strontium-90 activity.
     9.   Mount filter carefully in a 5 cm planchet and count.

Yttrium-90 Oxalate
     10.  Evaporate the supernate from step 2 almost to dryness.
     11.  Transfer  the contents of the beaker quantitatively into a
         centrifuge tube with four 10 ml portions distilled water.
     12.  Add 5 ml  of  15f1 ammonium hydroxide, stir, centrifuge, and discard
         supernate.
                                  B-03-4

-------
     13. Dissolve the precipitate 1n 20 ml of 2M HN03-
     14. Repeat steps 12 and 13.
     15. Follow steps 5-9 of the Hydroxide Separation.

Procedure - Hydroxide Separation
Yttrium-90 Oxalate
     1.  Transfer 1 ml of yttrium carrier into a centrifuge  tube and  add  1
         ml of strontium carrier.
     2.  Add 1 ml of ^Sr-^Y standard activity and dilute to
         approximately 20 ml with distilled water.
     3.  Add 5 ml of 15M ammonium hydroxide, stir,  and  centrifuge  the
         yttrium hydroxide.  Transfer the supernate Into  a 100 ml  beaker
         to be used for strontium precipitate.   Record  the time as:the
         start of decay of yttrium.
     4.  Dissolve the precipitate from step 3 in 20 ml  of 2M HN03.
     5.  Add 5 ml of ammonium hydroxide, stir,  and  centrifuge the
         precipitate.  Discard the supernate.
     6.  Repeat steps 4, 5, and 4 again.
     7.  To precipitate yttrium oxalate, add 5 ml of 1M oxalic acid and
         adjust to pH 1.5 with a pH meter, using approximately 2 ml of
         15M  NH4OH.  Stir and cool  in an ice bath  10-20  minutes.
         Centrifuge and discard the supernate.

Strontlnm-90 Oxalate or Carbonate
     8.  Transfer the precipitate quantitatively onto a membrane filter
         with three 10 ml portions of cold water.  Mash with three 10 ml
         portions of cold alcohol, dry, and weigh.
     9.  Mount filter carefully In a 5 cm planenet  and  count.
     10. Evaporate the supernate of step 3 almost to dryness.
     11. Transfer the contents of the beaker quantitatively  with two  5 ml
         portions of distilled water and three  10 ml  portions of fuming
         nitric acid into a centrifuge tube.
                                  B-03-5

-------
    12.  Cool in ice bath for 10-20 minutes,  centrifuge, and discard the
         supernate.
    13.  Follow the nitrate separation procedure  for strontium oxalate or
         carbonate precipitation procedure starting  at  step 3.

Yttrium-90 Efficiency Calculation
    The recovery of yttrium is calculated by  comparing  the weight of
yttrium carrier precipitated as yttrium oxalate and  the weight of the
sample.
    The efficiency is calculated by means of
                             E       c
                                 (A){R)(D) '
where

     E     =  counting efficiency of yttrium  cpm/dpm,
     T 1/2 =  the half-life of yttrium-90 (64.2 hours),
     t     =  time lapse from precipitation to counting (hours),
     C     =  net counts per minute,
     A     =  original activity in dpm,
     R     =  radiochemical yield express as  recovery of yttrium, and
     D     =  the decay calculated from D =    e  - .693 t  .
                                                   T 1/2
Sample Calculation
Sampl e
Number
   1
   2
                    E   = 	251	  =  0.52
                          (0.96) (507) (0.976)
                    E   = 	249	  =  0.53
                          (0.95) (507) (0.973)
                                  B-03-6
C
251
249
A
507
510
R
0.96
0.95
_t 	
2.25
2.50
D
0.976
0.973

-------
Strontium-90 Efficiency Calculation
     The recovery of strontium 1s  determined by comparing weight of
strontium carrier and that of precipitate on the filter.

     Calculate the stront1um-90 efficiency using the following equation:

      Efficiency  =  A-[(B)(C)(D)(E)]    =     A    -   (D)(E)
                         (B)(C)            (B)(C)
where

     A     =  net counts per minute,
     B     =  original activity in dpm,
     C     =  radiochemical yield  expressed as recovery of strontium
              carrier,
     D     =  the efficiency of the counter for 90Y,
     E     =  ingrowth of 90Y calculated from 1 -  e  '-^H- *  .

     t     =  time from   Y separation to counting (hours), artd
     T     =  the half-life of yttrium.

Sample Calculation
Sample
Number
1
2
E,
A
267.7
272.3

B
800
800
267.7
C
0.98
0.97
(0.52)
t
12
12
(0.122) =
E
0.122
0.122
0.28
D
0.52
0.52

                (0.98) (800)
                    272.3
                 (.97) (800)
ESr  =      272.3	  -  (0.52)  (0.122)  = 0.29
                                  B-03-7

-------
                    Preparation  of Gross Beta Standards

Principle
     Gross beta determinations sacrifice accuracy for  simplicity, and the
selection of a reference radlonuclide determines to a  great extent the
reliability of the obtained data.  Self-absorption and counting efficiency
depend upon a number of parameters,  among  them  chemical composition of the
compound and the radionuclldes present.
     The following materials were used to  Investigate  of  the use of proper
reference radionuclldes for the gross beta determination  In food and soil
ash:
(1)  Food ash prepared from a mixture of several types of food
     representing a total diet of an average U.S. consumer.
(2)  Soil from the eastern part of the United States.  The soil was ashed
     to oxidize any organic compounds which may have been present.
(3)  Vegetation ash.
(4)  M1lk ash.
(5)  Wheat grain cereal ash.
(6)  Residue of the evaporation of ocean water.
     The selection of a reference radlonucllde  for gross  beta
determination Is Important.  The aim of this Investigation was  to select a
reference radlonucllde which most nearly resembles the activity of the
particular natural sample.  The most accurate method would have been a
radiochemical separation of all possible and conceivable  radionuclldes 1n
the samples.  However, this was too elaborate for the  scope of  this
Investigation.  A simpler method with similar results  Is  the comparison of
the self-absorption of the sample with the self-absorption of the sample
contaminated with the suspected radlonuclide.  The latter method has the
advantage that it can be carried out in small laboratories with little
radiochemical capability.  Increasing amounts of the ashed sample are
placed on a planchet and counted.  The most likely radlonuclide is then
added to the ash and the procedure repeated.
                                  B-03-8

-------
     It has been established that in times when  no fresh fission products
are 1n the atmosphere the major beta emitters detectable by gross activity
determinations 1n the environmental  samples  are   Sr and   K.
     Since carrier-free 40K is not available, its substitution by
                                                                  40
natural potassium represents some uncertainties.  The abundance of   K
in natural potassium is only 0.10 percent.   This necessitates the addition
of a large amount of carrier potassium and an anion such as chloride.  The
results of the experiments described in this report indicate, however,
that in some cases the use of potassium as the reference radlonuclide is
justified.  Potassium is readily available and the small abundance of
40
  K makes weighing errors less probable.
     The similarity between the average energy of   K and   Sr-  Y
and their self-absorption curves up to a relatively long range permits
            90   90
the  use of   Sr-  Y for the calibration of  counting Instruments 1n
low absorption regions (1 mg/cm ) for  °K with little error.  Only
higher carrier content would result 1n erroneous results.
     At low carrier weights for different environmental samples, errors
                                                                  2
arising from the usage of any ash for weights not exceeding 1 mg/cm  are
small.  Silica gel has been used for these low weights as It is easy to
handle and readily available.  The best results  were obtained using a
compound with a mesh size above 325 (10 - 50 micron diameter).  It
contained no detectable activity and retained a  constant weight over the
required time.  Silica gel may also be used  as a substitute for ashed
samples, when large quantities of ash are not available.
     For the gross beta determination of food and vegetation, the
procedure described for   K should be used as the reference method.
                                       90
For gross beta determinations of soil,   Sr  (in  equilibrium with Its
                 90
daughter product   Y) is the preferred radionculide.  It should be noted
that these conclusions do not necessarily apply  to materials other than
soil, food, vegetation and biota.  Different contaminants in these
materials, due to different sampling procedures  and/or geographical
origin, may require a different reference method.
                                  B-03-9

-------
Reagents
     Potassium chloride
     Silica gel (10-50 micron diameter mesh)
     Strontium-90 standard
     Ethanol (95 percent)

Procedure
     Self-absorption curve of natural  activity of ashed  samples
         1.  Prepare duplicate samples on 5 cm planchet  with the  following
             approximate mg weights of ash or silica gel: 20, 40, 80,  120,
             160, 200, 300, 400, 600,  1000, 3000, 5000.
         2.  Add 5-10 ml etnano! to each planchet.
         3.  Evaporate gently to dryness.  (If an even distribution  is not
             achieved the first time,  add 5-10 ml of ethanol and  evaporate
             gently to dryness).
         4.  Weigh the content of the  planchet accurately (it should be
             kept in a desiccator).
         5.  Count.

     Self-absorption curve of Potassium-40
     Place 10 g of potassium chloride  in a beaker and dissolve it in
50 ml of water.  Add 50g of ash and stir thoroughly with a glass  rod.
Evaporate to dryness and follow the above procedure for  natural activity
(steps 1-5) by weighing aliquots of the dried material on planchets.

     Self-absorption curve of Strontium-90 -  Yttrium-90
     Place 50 g of ash in a beaker, add 100 ml of ethanol and 1 ml of
90
  Sr standard (2,000 dpm).  Stir thoroughly with  a glass rod and
evaporate to dryness.  Follow the preceding procedure for natural activity
(steps 1-5).
                                  B-03-10

-------
Calculations
     Since the natural  activity of a  sample  is usually unknown, the
self-absorption curve is prepared by  calculating the cpm/mg of each
                                        2                    2
planchet and plotting this against mg/cm .   Extrapolate mg/cnr to zero
and use this value as cpm/mg with no  self-absorption.  Counting Tosses at
the various weights can be calculated and a  subsequent curve can be drawn
                                  2
plotting percent loss versus mg/cm .
     This curve is then used in the following equation relating measured
counts to sample activity:
                    pCi/g	 ,
                             (2.22)(B)(C){D)
where
     A     =  net cpm,
     B     =  counting  efficiency in terms  of cpm/dpm,
     C     =  weight of sample in grams,
     D     =  transmittance,  as 1 - self-absorption, and
     2.22  =  dpm/pCi.

                   Preparation of Gross Alpha Standards

     Most of the comments made for gross  beta determination apply to the
gross alpha activity determination.  An additional complication is the
short range of alpha particles and the varied energies of natural
radioactivity.
                                                      239
     For the preparation of the self-absorption curve,    Pu was
selected as the reference radionuclide.  Advantages of this radtonuclide
are (1) its energy of 5 MeV is an average between  the naturally occurring
alpha emitters, {2} the long half-life of the daughter product    U
delays its production even in several years,  and (3) plutonium has no beta
and only small gamma emission.
                                 B-03-11

-------
     The procedure for preparing standards  for  self-absorption curves is
identical to that of 90Sr-90Y,  replacing  90Sr by  239Pu.

Calculations
     The gross alpha self-absorption curve  is prepared exactly the same as
that for gross beta.  However,  due to the short range of alpha particles,
the infinite thickness is readily obtained  and  the  specific activity is
easily determined.  It is not necessary to  go beyond 2000 mg  in weight.
     Calculate the gross alpha activity from the  following equation:

          gross alpha, pCi/g =	A	,
                               (2.22)(B)(C)(D)
where

     A     =  net cpm,
     B     =  counting efficiency in terms of cpm/dpm,
     C     =  weight of sample in grams,
     D     =  transmittance, 1 - self-absorption,  and
     2.22  =  dpm/pCi.

     For an infinitely thick sample, (2.22)(B)(C)(0)  is a constant and
this calculation is reduced to pCi/g = A  K,  where K  =	1	
                                                       (2.22)(B)(C)(D)
Motes
1.  Metricel is a trademark of Gelman Sciences,  Inc.,  Ann Arbor,  Michigan.

References
1.  Porter, C.R., Augustine, R.J., Matusek, J.M., Jr., and Carter,  M.W.,
    Procedures for Determination of Stable Elements and Radionuclides  in
    Environmental Samples, U.S. Department of Health,  Education,  and
    Welfare, Public Health Service Publication Number 999-RH-10 (1965).

                                  B-03-12

-------
       RADIOCHEMICAL DETERMINATION OF AMERICIUM-241 IN ASHED SAMPLES
           (Including Soil, Fly Ash, Ores, Vegetation and Biota)

Principle
     The sample is ashed at 550°C  for  72 hours.   Americium-243  tracer is
added to a weighed aliquot of sample.   The  sample is  then  solubillzed with
a mixture of HF and HC104.  Plutonium  and uranium are removed by
extraction into triisooctylamine  (TIOA). Thorium Is  removed by adsorption
on anion exchange resin.  Americium Is extracted  from nitric acid  into
dibutyl-N, N-diethyl carbamyl phosphonate (DOCP).  The americium Is
stripped from DDCP with dilute nitric  acid  and coprecipltated with 0.1 mg
lanthanum as fluoride.   The actinide 1s radioassayed  by alpha spectroscopy.

Special Apparatus
     1.  Nuclepore filter membranes, 25 mm  dia.,  0.2  micrometer pore size
         or equivalent.  See Note 1.
     2.  Suction filter for 25 mm membrane.
     3.  Plastic graduated cylinder, 100 ml  volume.
     4.  Separator/ funnels,  1 liter capacity.
     5.  Planchets, stainless steel, 32 mm diameter.
     6.  Alpha spectrometric system consisting of multichannel  analyzer
         biasing electronics, printer, silicon surface barrier  detectors,
         vacuum pump and chamber.
     7.  Teflon beakers.  See Note 2.
     8.  Ion exchange column, 2 cm diameter, 10.5 cm  length.

Reagents
     1.  Americium-243 tracer solution.  Approximately 1 pCi  per ml,
         calibrated.
     2.  Anion exchange resin.  BioRad AG1X8 or equivalent (200-400 mesh,
         nitrate form).  Convert to nitrate form for  thorium separation  by
                                  AM-01-1

-------
    washing the resin with 6f1 HN03 until  the  washing  shows no  trace
    of chloride when tested with AgMO-j.   See  Note  3.
3.  Dibutyl-N, M-diethyl carbarnyl  phosphonate (DDCP).   See Note 4.
4.  Hydrochloric acid, 131, 37 percent HC1  reagent.
5.  Hydrochloric acid, 9^.  Dilute 750 ml  of  the 37 percent  reagent
    grade HC1  to 1 liter with distilled water.
6.  Hydrochloric acid, 1M.  Dilute 83 ml  of the 37 percent reagent
    grade HC1  to 1 liter with distilled water.
7.  Hydrofluoric acid, 29M, 48 percent HF reagent.
8.  Hydrofluoric acid, 3*1.  Dilute 104 ml  of  the 48 percent  reagent
    grade HF to 1 liter with distilled water.  Use a  plastic graduate
    and storage bottle.
9.  Hydrogen peroxide, 50 percent reagent grade.
10. Lanthanum carrier, O.lmg La   per ml.  Dissolve 0.0799g
11. La(M03)3» 6H20 per 250 ml 1M HC1.
12. Mi trie acid, 16M, 70 percent HN03 reagent.
13. Nitric acid, 1214.  Dilute 750 ml  of the 70 percent reagent grade
    HN03 to 1 liter with distilled water.
14. Nitric acid, 6M.  Dilute 375 ml of the 70 percent reagent grade
    HH03 to 1 liter with distilled water.
15. Nitric acid, 2M.  Dilute 167 ml of the 70 percent reagent grade
    HN03 to 1 liter with distilled water.
16. Perchloric acid, 12M, 70 percent HCIO^ reagent.
17. Silver nitrate, crystalline reagent.
18. Silver nitrate, 0.1M.  Dissolve 1.7 g AgN03 reagent in
    distilled water.  Add 1 ml 6M HN03 and dilute  to  100 ml  with
    distilled water.
19. Triisooctylamine (TIOA), reagent grade.
20. TIOA solution in p-xylene, 10 percent.  Dissolve  100 ml
    triisooctylamine in p-xylene and dilute to 1 liter with  p-xylene.
21. p-Xylene, reagent grade.
                             AM-01-2

-------
Sample Preparation
     1.  Add weighed 1 gram aliquot of ashed sample to Teflon beaker.
     2.  Add measured aliquot of americium-243 tracer solution.
     3.  Add 15 ml of 29M HF and evaporate to dryness.   Repeat this  step
         two more times to volatilize silica as S1F4>
     4.  Add 5 ml of 12M HC104 and 5 ml of 9M HC1.  Evaporate to dryness
         and repeat tbis step.
     5.  Add 10 ml 12M HC1 and dissolve residue.
     6.  Transfer sample to 400 ml glass beaker, washing Teflon beaker
         with 9M HC1.
     7.  Evaporate solution in glass beaker to dryness.  Add 10 ml  12M^ HC1
         and repeat this step.  Avoid baking solids.

Determination
     1.  Dissolve sample by adding 100 ml 9M HC1 and warming beaker to
         maximum of 50°C.
     2.  Add 2 ml 50 percent H202.  Heat gently and set aside for 10
         minutes.
     3.  Place 100 ml 10 percent TIOA in 500 ml separatory funnel.   Add 50
         ml 9M HC1 and shake for one minute to equilibrate.  Allow phases
         to separate cleanly and draw off and discard lower aqueous acid
         phase.
     4.  Add sample to TIOA in separatory funnel and shake for two
         minutes.  Vent funnel stopcock frequently to avoid pressure
         build-up in funnel.
     5.  Allow phases to separate cleanly.  Draw off and save aqueous acid
         phase.
     6.  Add 50 ml 9M HC1 to TIOA solution to separatory funnel and shake
         for 1 minute.
     7.  Allow phases to separate and drain 9M HC1 wash into beaker
         containing acid from step 5.
     8.  Repeat  steps 6 and 7.
                                  AM-01-3

-------
9.  Put combined acid phases In clean 500 ml  separatory  funnel and
    add 100 ml p-xylene to funnel.   Shake for one minute.
10. Allow phases to separate cleanly and drain off  aqueous  acid phase
    Into clean beaker.
11. Add 10 ml 101 HN03 and 5 ml 12M HC104 to  aqueous  acfd phase
    and evaporate to near dryness.   Do not overheat solids.
12. Add 10 ml 16M HN03 and evaporate to near  dryness.
13. Dissolve sample in 50 ml of 6N HNOj with  warming.
14. Prepare ion exchange column with 25 ml of anion exchange  resin.
    Wash resin with 100 ml of 6M HN03.
15. Place sample in 125 ml separatory funnel  on top of column acting
    as reservoir.
16. Allow sample to flow through column at the rate of approximately
    2 ml per minute.  Collect eluate and do not allow column  to run
    dry.
17. Flow 100 ml 614 HN03 through column after  sample has  passed
    through.  Collect in same beaker as sample.
18. Evaporate eluate just to dryness and allow beaker containing
    residue to cool.
19. Add 20 ml distilled water to residue and  swirl  to dissolve
    residue.  The solution may not appear completely  clear  at this
    step.
20. Add 10 ml of 16M HN03 to the solution and heat  to near  boiling.
21. Remove the solution from the hot plate and add  10 ml of 16M
    HN03.
22. Pour the solution into a 125 ml separatory funnel and rinse the
    beaker with two 10 ml volumes of 16M HN03.  Transfer rinses to
    funnel.
23. Allow the solution to cool to ambient temperature and add 1 ml of
    DDCP.
24. Shake the separatory funnel vigorously for 15 seconds.
                             AM-01-4

-------
25. Allow the layers to separate for at least 2  hours  or overnight if
    possible.
26. Drain and discard the aqueous (lower)  layer.
27. Add 10 ml of 12M HN03 into the funnel  and shake  for 5  seconds.
28. Allow 1 hour for the layers to separate,  drain and discard the
    lower rinse solution.  See Note 5.
29. Add 10 ml p-xylene to the DDCP in the  separator? funnel.
30. Add 20 ml of 2M HN03 to the funnel  and shake vigorously for 15
    seconds.
31. Allow the layers to separate for at least 30 minutes and  drain
    strip solution into a 100 ml beaker.
32. Repeat step 30 and combine second strip solution with  first.
33. Place combined 2M HN03 strip solution  in clean  125 ml
    separatory funnel.
34. Add 25 ml p-xylene to funnel and shake for 15 seconds.
35. Allow phases to separate and drain lower layer  into clean 100 ml
    beaker.
36. Evaporate strip solution just to dry ness.
37. Add 10 ml 16M HN03 and 5 ml 12M HC104  to beaker and evaporate
    to dry ness.
38. Add 10 ml 12M HC1 and evaporate to near dryness.
39. Take up  residue 1n 50 ml 1M HC1.
40. Heat on water bath to 80°C with stirring.
41. Suspend clean nickel foil strip into solution for  two  hours to
    remove traces of polonium.
42. Remove nickel strip and evaporate solution to dryness.
43. Add 15 ml 1M_ HC1 to beaker and warm to dissolve residue.
44. Coprecipitate amertclum fluoride by adding 1 ml  of lanthanum
    carrier  and 5 ml 314 HF.  Mix well and set aside for 30 minutes.
45. Filter coprecipitated sample through a filter membrane with
    suction.
46. Rinse sample beaker with water and add to filter funnel.
                             AM-01-5

-------
     47.    Rinse beaker with alcohol and add to funnel.  Mash funnel with
           alcohol.
     48.    Disassemble filter funnel when membrane Is dry.  Mount membrane
           on a 32 mm planehet using double stick tape.
     49.    Radloassay sample for amerfclum-241 In alpha spectrometer.

Calculations
     Calculate the concentration,  Z, of amerlclum-241 In picocuries per
gram as follows:
                      z =        (A-AL)(F)
                          (2.22)(B-Bi)(E)(H)(T)
where
     A     =  gross  sample counts which appear In the americiuin-241 alpha
              energy region,
     A.    =  background counts in the same alpha energy region as A above,
     F     =  total  calibrated tracer  counts for same counting time as
              sample counts,
     2.22  =  dpm per pCi,
     B     »  gross  tracer counts which appear in the alpha energy  region
              of the tracer  Isotope,
     B.    =  background counts 1n the same alpha energy region as £ above,
     E     =  alpha  detector efficiency,
     U     =  sample weight  (grams), and
     T     =  counting time  (minutes).

     Calculate the lower limit of detection (LLD) In picocuries per gram
as follows:

                  LID-       *-66V  CBT
                           (2.22)(E)(R)(W)(T)
                                 AM-01-6

-------
where
     Cg    =  background count rate,
     T     =  counting time,
     2.22  =  dptn per pCi,
     E     =  alpha detector efficiency,
     R     =  fractional yield based on B-Bj/F in calculation, and
     W     =  sample weight (grams).

     This LLD calculation is valid if the sample counting time is equal to
the background counting time.
Notes
1.  Nuclepore is a registered trademark of Nuclepore Corp., Pleasanton, CA.
2.  Teflon is a registered trademark of DuPont Co., Wilmington,  DE.
3.  Thorium in the sample may be determined by washing the resin with
    water and measuring the thorium in the wash.
4.  DDCP is currently available from Columbia Organic Chemical  Company,
    Columbia, SC.
5.  When draining the separatory funnel always allow a small  quantity of
    aqueous phase to remain in funnel.  Avoid letting organic phase  into
    stopcock.
6.  If plutonium analysis is attempted sequentially with americium,  the
    plutonium-242 tracer should be checked for plutonium-241  content.
    This isotope decays to americium-241.

References
1.  Moore, F. L., "Liquid-Liquid Extraction of Uranium and Plutonium from
    Hydrochloric Acid Solution with Tri (iso-octyl) amine," Analytical
    Chemistry 30, 908 (1958).
2.  Butler, F. E., "Determination of Actinides in Biological  Samples with
    Bidenate Organophosphorus Extractant," Analytical Chemistry  42,  1073
    (1970).

                                 AM-01-7

-------
        RADIOCHEMICAL DETERMINATION OF CARBON-14 IN AQUEOUS SAMPLES

Principle
     Carbon carrier In  the  form of sodium oxalate  Is added to an
unacidified aqueous sample  in a closed distillation apparatus.  An
oxidizing agent and acid are  added to the sample to convert carbon
compounds to C02.   Nitrogen is slowly bubbled  through  the sample and
heat is applied to transfer the C02 into  a  flask containing a basic
CaCl2 solution.  The collected CaC03 is centrifuged, washed,
transferred to a planenet,  weighed, and counted.

Special Apparatus
     1.  Low background beta  particle counter  with a window less, than
         2 mg/cm  thickness.
     2.  Centri fuge.
     3.  Stainless steel planchets,  5 cm  diameter.
     4.  Infrared heat  lamp.
     5.  Distillation apparatus (see Figure 1).

Reagents
     1.  Ammonium hydroxide,  15 n.  NH^OH reagent.
     2.  Ammonium hydroxide,  0.1 H.  Dilute 6.7 ml of  the NH^OH reagent
         to 1 liter with distilled water.
     3.  Calcium chloride,  crystalline reagent.
     4.  Calcium chloride,  1.5 H.   Dissolve 166.5  g CaCl2 reagent in 700
         ml distilled water and dilute to 1 liter  with distilled water.
     5.  Potassium permanganate, crystalline reagent.
     6.  Potassium permanganate, 0.5 M.   Dissolve  79.0 g KMn04 reagent
         in 700 ml distilled  water and dilute  to 1 liter with distilled
         water.
     7.  Sodium oxalate, crystalline reagent.
     8.  Sodium oxalate carrier, 0.1 M.   Dissolve  13.4 g NaC0
                                 C-01-1

-------
         reagent In dfstflled water and  dilute to 1 liter with distilled
         water.   See Note 1.
     9.  Sulfurlc acid,  18 fl.  96 percent  H2S04  reagent.
     10. Sulfurlc acid,  9 M.   Dilute 500 ml H2S04 to 1 liter with
         distilled water.
Procedure
     1.  Add 1 ml  Na2C204 solution to a  200 nil  neutral or basic
         sample 1n a distillation flask.
     2.  Start a slow bubbling of nitrogen or COg-free air through the
         solution and connect the distilling outlet to a 200 ml receiving
     •    flask containing 100 ml  0.1  M NH4OH and  1 ml 1.5 ^ CaClg.
     3.  With the system closed,  add  1 ml 0.5 M KMn04 and 5 ml 9 M
         HgS04 through the separator/ funnel to the distilling flask
         and swirl to mix contents.
     4.  Heat flask and boil  contents gently for  30 minutes while bubbling
         the N2 (or air) through  the  distilling and receiving flasks.
     5.  Transfer the precipitated CaC03 from the receiving flask to a
         centrifuge tube.  Centrifuge and discard supernatant solution.
     6.  Wash precipitate twice with  15  ml aliquots of boiled distilled
         water and discard wash solutions.
     7.  Take up precipitate in 5 ml  boiled distilled water and transfer
         quantitatively to a weighed  stainless  steel planchet.
     8.  Dry precipitate under a  heat lamp, cool,  and weigh.  Compute
         chemical  yield based on  the  total weight of CaC03 formed.
     9.  Count with a thin window beta particle counter (< 2 mg/cm ).

Calculation
     Calculate the concentration, Z,  of  carbon-14 in picocurfes per
milliliter as follows:

                        7 =     cl '  CB
                            (2.22)(EMV)(R)

                                  C-01-2

-------
where
     C.    =  gross count/minute of sample,
     CB    =  background counts/minute,
     E     =  beta particle counter efficiency,
     V     =  sample volume (ml),
     R     =  fractional chemical yield, and
     2.22  =  dpm/pCi.

     Calculate the lower limit of detection (LLD)  for carbon-14  in
picocuries per milliliter as follows:
                      LLD =     4'66
                            (2.22)(E)(V)(R)(T)

where

     CB  =  background counts/minute,
     E     =  beta particle counter efficiency,
     V     =  sample volume (ml),
     R     =  fractional chemical yield,
     T     =  counting time, and
     2.22  =  dpm/pCi.

     This LLD calculation is valid if the sample counting time is same  as
the  background counting time.
 Notes
 1.   The  Na2C204  should  be  standardized frequently by distillation
     with boiled  distilled  water.  One ml of 0.1 M Na2C204 is
     equivalent to 20 mg CaC03.  The  standardized value will include any
     C02  absorbed by the carrier solution upon standing.
                                   C-01-3

-------
References
1.   Krieger, H.L., and Gold, S., Procedure for Radlochemical  Analysis  of
     Nuclear Reactor Aqueous Solutions, EPA-R4-73-014,  May 1973.
                                  C-01-4

-------
                   Dropping
                     Funnel
                                                        Vent
                                                         Basic CaCI2
Sample
                Figure 1.  Carbon-14 distillation apparatus.

                             C-01-5

-------
       RADIXHEMICAL DETERMINATION OF TRITIUM IN MILK. SOIL. URINE.
                 VEGETATION AMD OTHER BIOLOGICAL SAMPLES

                            Azeotropic Method

Principle
     Tritium activity in the water content of a sample is radioassayed
after separating the water froro the  sample by a cyclohexane-water
azeotropic distillation.  A measured aliquot of the sample is heated in an
azeotrope still together with  cyclohexane.  The separated water is
measured and counted for tritiun using a  liquid scintillation spectrometer.

Special Apparatus
     1.  Azeotropic still. See Figure 1.
     2.  Liquid scintillation  counter, ambient temperature operation. See
         Mote 1.
     3.  Low background counting vials, 25 ml capacity.  See Note 2.

Reagents
     1.  p-Bis (o-methylstyryl) benzene (bis MSB).
     2.  Cyclohexane, spectrophotometrie  grade reagent.
     3.  Desiccant, calcium chloride type.
     4.  2,5-Diphenyloxazole  (PRO).
     5.  Scintillation solution. Dissolve 7.0 g of 2,5-diphenyloxazole
         (PRO) and 1.5 g of p-bis  (o-methylstyryl) benzene  (bis MSB) in 1
         liter of p-xylene. Mix this  solution with Triton N101 in a
         volume ratio of 2.75  parts  of p-xylene solution to 1 part of
         Triton MIDI.  The correct volume of Triton N101 is 364 ml for
         each liter of p-xylene. Store the solution  in a brown bottle and
         protect from sunlight.
     6.  Tritiated water standard containing nominally 5 X 10  dpm
          H/ml known to 3 percent accuracy.
                                  H-01-1

-------
     7.   Triton  N101,  Rohm and  Haas Co., Philadelphia, PA.   See Mote 3.
     8.   p-Xylene,  scintillation grade reagent.
Procedure
     1.   Add  measured  sample and cyclohexane to distillation flask using
         amounts  shown in Table 1.
     2.   Assemble distillation apparatus and heat sample flask until  water
         stops collecting in receiver.
     3.   Stop distillation  and measure volume of collected water.
     4.   Place 10 ml aliquot of collected water in liquid scintillation
         vial and add  15 ml scintillation solution.
     5.   Prepare  blank solution with low tritium water using same volume
         of water as sample.
     6.   Prepare  standard solution of tritiated water with same volume of
         water as sample.
     7.   Place sample  vials in liquid scintillation counter and allow
         vials to dark adapt for one hour before starting counting
         sequence.

Calculations
     Calculate the concentration,  Z, of tritium in picocuries per sample
as follows:

                           Z =   Cl  ' CB
                               (2.22HEHV)
where
     C.    =  gross beta counts per minute,
     CB    =  scintillation counter background counts per minute,
     E     =  counting efficiency,
     V     =  sample size, and
     2.22  =  dpm per pCi.
                                  H-01-2

-------
     Calculate the lower limit of detection (LLD)  in  picocuries  per sample
as follows:
                                     /
                       LLD =    ~"vw ^  CBT
                             (2.22)(E)(T)(V)

where
     n
    C     = background count rate,
    T   = counting time,
    E   = counting efficiency,
    V   = sample size, and.
    2.22  - dpm per pCi.

    This LLD calculation is valid if the sample counting time is same as
the background counting time.
Notes
1.  For optimum performance of the scintillation solution, the temperature
    of the counting instrument should be kept should be between 18 and
    25°C.
2.  Low potassium glass or plastic vials should be used to minimize
    background counts.  Plastic vials should be resistant to the
    scintillation solution.  The solvent, p-xylene, will migrate through
    the plastic vials, therefore the samples should be counted no longer
    than three days after preparation.
3.  Triton N101 is a tradename for a nonylphenol polyethylene glycol  ether.

References
1.  W. M. Jones, J. Chemical Physics, 48, 207 (1968).
                                  H-01-3

-------
2.  1969 Book of ASTM Standards, Part 18,  2nd ed.,  American Society for
    Testing and Materials, pp. 16-19.
3.  R. Lieberman and A. A. Moghissi,  Inter.  J. Appl.  Rad.  Isotopes, 21,
    319 (1970).
4.  A. A. Moghissi, E. W. Bretthauer, and  E. H. Compton, Analytical
    Chemistry. 45 1965, (1973).
5.  A. A. Moghissi, Health Physics, 41, 413, (1981).
                                  H-01-4

-------
                              TABLE  1
           Sample Sizes and the Quantity of Cyclohexane
                 Required  for  Various  Sample Types
Sample                      Sample                      Cyclohexane
 Type	Size	  (ml)

Soil                         200 g                          1300
Hay                           50 g                           400
Green Chop                    30 g                            70
Biological Tissue             30 g                           150
Urine                         20 ml                           50
Milk                          30 ml                           70
                              H-01-5

-------
   DRYING AGENT
COOLING WATER
                  Figure 1.  Azeotrope still.
                         H-01-6

-------
             RADIOCHEMICAL DETERMINATION OF TRITIUM IN WATER

                              Dioxane Method

Principle
     Water samples that have  been distilled are  incorporated into a
counting mixture consisting of dioxane,  naphthalene, and fluors.  The
tritium is assayed on a liquid scintillation  spectrometer.

Special Apparatus
     1.  Liquid scintillation counter.
     2.  Low background counting vials.
     3.  Sample distillation  glassware.

Reagents
     1.  p-Bis (o-methylstyryl) benzene  (bis  MSB).
     2.  p-Dioxane, scintillation grade.
     3.  2,5-Diphenyloxazole  (PRO).
     4.  Desiccant, calcium sulfate type.
     5.  Naphthalene, scintillation grade.
     6.  Tritiated water standard containing  nominally 5 X  10  dpm
          H/ml known to 3 percent accuracy.
     7.  Scintillation solution.  Dissolve  7.0 g of  2,5 diphenyloxazole
         (PPO), 1.5 g p-bis (o-methylstyryl)  benzene (bis MSB) and 120 g
         naphthalene in 800 ml p-dioxane and  dilute  to 1 liter with
         p-dioxane.  Store the solution  in  a  brown bottle and protect from
         sunlight.

Procedure
     1.  Distill aqueous sample in glass.   Collect enough distillate for
         at least two determinations.
     2.  Dispense 16 ml of the above scintillation solution into a
                                  H-02-1

-------
         counting vial.   Add 4 ml  of the  distilled aqueous sample, cap
         vial  and shake  to mix contents.
     3.  Prepare standards and backgrounds identical to the samples using
         low tritium water, if available, for preparing background samples.
     4.  Place sample vials in liquid scintillation counter and allow
         vials to dark adapt for one hour before starting counting
         sequence.
     5.  Count samples in duplicate  for at least 50 minutes each.

Calculations
     Calculate the concentration,  Z, of tritium in picocuries per liter as
follows:
                                 Cl  "  CB
                               (2.22MEMV)
where

     Cj    =  gross beta counts per minute,
     CB    =  scintillation counter background  counts  per minute,
     E     =  counting efficiency,
     V     =  volume of water (liters),  and
     2.22  =  dpm per pCi.

     Calculate the lower limit of detection  (LLD)  in picocuries  per liter
as follows:
                       LLD =
                                4.66VCBT
                                     Y   Q
                             (2.22)(E)(T){V)
where

     Cg    =  background count rate,


                                  H-02-2

-------
     T     =  counting time,
     E     =  counting efficiency,
     V     =  sample size (liters),  and
     2.22  =  dpm per pCi.

     This LLD calculation is  valid  if the sample  counting  time  is same as
the background counting time.
References
1.   Butler, F. E., "Determination of Tritium in  Water  and  Urine,"
     Analytical Chemistry 33, 409-411, (1961).
                                  H-02-3

-------
              RADIOCHEMICAL DETERMINATION OF TRITIUM IN WATER

                             Emulsion Method

Principle
     Water samples that have been distilled are incorporated into  a
counting mixture consisting of a primary solvent,  emulsifier,  and  fluors.
The tritium is assayed on a liquid scintillation spectrometer.

Special Apparatus
     1.  Liquid scintillation counter, ambient temperature operation.   See
         Note 1.
     2.  Low background counting vials, 25 ml  capacity.   See Note  2.
     3.  Sample distillation glassware.

Reagents
     1.  p-Bis  (o-methylstyryl) benzene (bis MSB).
     2.  2, 5 - Diphenyloxazole (PRO).
     3.  Desiccant, calcium sulfate type,
     4.  Tritiated water standard containing nominally 5 x 10  dpm
         3H/ml  known to 3 percent accuracy.
     5.  Triton N101,  Rohm and Haas Co., Philadelphia, PA.  See Note 3.
     6.  p-Xylene, scintillation grade reagent.
     7.  Scintillation solution.  Dissolve 7.0 grams of 2, 5 -
         diphenyloxazole (PPO) and 1.5 grams of p-bis (o-methylstyryl)
         benzene  (bis  MSB) in one liter of p-xylene.
         Mix  the  above solution and Triton N101 in a volume ratio of 2.75
         parts  of p-xylene to 1 part of Triton N101.  The correct volume
         of Triton N101  is 364 ml for each liter of p-xylene.  Store the
          solution in a brown bottle and protect from sunlight.
                                   H-03-1

-------
Procedure
     1.  Distill aqueous sample in glass.   Collect  enough  (>25 ml)
         distillate for at least two determinations.
     2.  Dispense 15 ml of the above scintillation  solution  into a 25 ml
         counting vial.  Add 10 ml of the  distilled aqueous  sample, cap
         vial and shake to mix contents.   See Note  4.
     3.  Prepare standards and backgrounds identical to the  samples using
         low tritium water, if available,  for preparing background samples.
     4.  Place sample vials in liquid scintillation counter  and allow
         vials to dark adapt for one hour  before starting  counting
         sequence.
     5.  Count each sample in duplicate for at least 50 minutes each.

Calculations
     Calculate the concentration, Z, of tritium in  picocuries per liter as
follows:
                           Z =
                               (2.22MEMV)
where

     Cj    =  gross beta counts per minute,
     CB    =  scintillation counter background counts  per minute,
     E     =  counting efficiency,
     V     =  volume of water (liters),  and
     2.22  =  dpm per pCi.

     Calculate the lower limit of detection  (LLD)  in picocuries per liter
as follows:
                       LLD =
   4.66VCgT
(2.22)(E)(T)(V)
                                  H-03-2

-------
where

     Cn    =  background count rate,
     T     =  counting time,
     E     =  sample size (liters),  and
     2.22  = .dpm per pCi.

     This LLD calculation is  valid if the sample counting  time  is  same as
the background counting time.
Notes
1.  For optimum performance of the scintillation solution,  the temperature
    of the counting instrument should be kept should be between 18 and
    25°C.
2.  Low potassium glass or plastic vials should be used to  minimize
    background counts.  Plastic vials should be resistant to the
    scintillation solution.  The solvent, p-xylene, will migrate through
    the plastic vials, therefore the samples should be counted no longer
    than three days after preparation.
3.  Triton MIDI is a brand name for a nonyl  phenol polyethylene glycol
    ether.
4.  Smaller vials can be used, keeping the added aqueous sample at 40
    percent of the capacity of the vial, and scintillation  solution at  60
    percent.

References
1.  Lieberman, R. and Moghissi, A. A., "Low-level counting  by Liquid
    Scintillation, II. Application of Emulsions in Tritium Counting,"
    Inter. J. Appl. Rad. Isotopes. 21, 319 (1970).
                                  H-03-3

-------
        RADIOCHEHICAL  DETERMINATION OF  IODINE-131 IN DRINKING MATER

Principle
     Stable fodate carrier is added to an acidified sample of drinking
water.  After reduction to the iodide state by Ma2S03,  the radioiodine
is precipitated as Agl.  The precipitate is dissolved and purified by
addition of zinc powder and sulfuric acid.  The iodine is reprecipitated
as PdI2 for radioassay.

Special Apparatus
     1.  Low background beta counter.
     2.  Centrifuge.
     3.  Electric hot plate.
     4.  Suction filter apparatus for 25 mm filter membranes.
     5.  Metricel DM800 membrane filters, 25mm diameter, 0.8 micrometer
         pore size or equivalent.  See Note 1.
     6.  Stainless steel planchets, 5 cm diameter.
     7.  Glassware
     8.  Analytical balance.

Reagents
     1.  Ammonium hydroxide, IBM.  Reagent grade NH^OH.
     2.  Ammonium hydroxide, 6M.  Mix 400 ml 15M NH4OH with 600 ml
         distilled water.
     3.  Ethanol, 95  percent reagent.
     4.  Hydrochloric acid,  12H, 37 percent HC1 reagent.
     5.  Hydrochloric acid, 6M.  Dilute 500 ml of the 37 percent reagent
         grade HC1 to 1 liter with distilled water.
     6.  lodate carrier, 10 mg  lO^/ml.  Dissolve 12.24 g KI03 in
         900 ml distilled water and dilute to 1 liter with distilled
         water.   See  Note 2  for standardization.
      7.  Nitric acid,  16M, 70 percent HN03 reagent.
                                   1-01-1

-------
     8.   Nitric acid,  0.4^.  Dilute 25  ml  reagent grade HN03 to 1 liter
         with distilled water.
     9.   Palladium chloride, 0.2M.  Dissolve  3.55g PdClg • 2H20 in 90
         ml  distilled  water  and dilute to 100 ml  with distilled water.
     10.  Silver nitrate, 0.1M.   Dissolve  16.99g  AgN03 in  900 ml
         distilled water and dilute to 1  liter with  distilled water.
     11.  Sodium sulfite, 1M.  Dissolve 12.6g  Na2S03  in 90 ml distilled
         water and dilute to 100 ml with  distilled water.  Prepare  fresh
         daily.
     12.  Sulfuric acid, 1M.   Dilute 56 ml of  the 96  percent reagent grade
         H2S04 to 1 liter with distilled  water.
     13.  Zinc, reagent grade powder.

Procedures
     1.   To a 2 liter drinking water sample add  15 ml 16^ HN03 and  1  ml
         iodate carrier and mix well.
     2.   Add 4 ml freshly prepared 1M Na2S03 and stir for 30 minutes.
     3.   Add 20 ml 0.1 fl AgN03, stir for one hour and allow precipitate
         formed to settle for another hour.
     4.   Decant as much supernate as possible without losing  any
         precipitate and discard.
     5.   Filter the remaining liquid through a filter membrane and  discard
         filtrate.
     6.   Transfer the  filter membrane and precipitate (Agl) to a
         centrifuge tube and slurry with 10 ml  water.
     7.   Add 1 gram zinc powder and 2 ml  W H2S04 and stir  frequently
         for 30 minutes.
     8.   Filter mixture from step 7 with suction using  a filter membrane
         and collect filtrate in a centrifuge tube.   Use five ml  water to
         wash residue  and filter chimney.  Discard residue.
     9.   Add 2 ml 6M HC1 to filtrate and heat tube containing filtrate in
         a water bath  at 60°C.
                                  1-01-2

-------
     10. Add  1  ml  0.2  M PdClg and digest  for at least five minutes while
        heating.
     11. Centrifuge  and discard  supernate.
     12. Dissolve  the  precipitate in  5 ml 6M NH4OH and heat in a boiling
        water  bath  until  clear.
     13. Filter solution  from step  12 with  suction using a filter membrane
        or equivalent.   Collect filtrate in a centrifuge tube washing the
        residue and filter chimney with  5  ml water.  Discard residue.
     14. Add 6M HC1  to filtrate  from  step 13 until color changes to
        yellow, using approximately  2 ml 6M HC1.  Add an additional  2 ml
        6M HC1 and  heat  to 60°C in a water both.
     15. Add 1  ml  0.2M PdCl2 to  reprecipitate PdI2 and digest on the
        water  bath  for ten minutes.  Cool  slightly.
     16. Filter through a tared  filter membrane transferring precipitate
        from tube to filter with water.  Wash precipitate with 5 ml
         ali quots  of water and  ethanol.
     17. Dry precipitate  at 70°C for  30  minutes to constant weight and
        weigh  to  the nearest 0.1 mg.
     18.  Place  filter on  planchet and count on a  low background beta
         counter for 1000 minutes.

Calculations
     Calculate  the concentration, Z.  of  iodine-131 in picocuries per  liter
as follows:
                        Z =
                            (2.22){A)(E)(V)(R)

where

     C     =  net count rate, counts per minute,
     A     =  decay correction for iodine-131 (half-life =8.04 days),
     E     =  counter efficiency,


                                  1-01-3

-------
     V     =  sample volume (liters),
     R     =  fractional chemical yield based on weight  of  PdI2,  and
     2.22  =  dpm per pCi.

     Calculate the lower limit of detection (LLD) in picocuries of
iodine-131 per liter as follows:
                      LLD =      '      CBT
                            (2.22)(E)(R)(T)(V)
where

     CB    =  background count rate,
     E     =  beta counter efficiency,
     R     =  fractional chemical yield based on weight of PdI2,
     T     =  counting time (same for sample and background),
     V     =  sample size (liters),  and
     2.22  =  dpm per pCi.

     This LLD calculation is valid if the sample counting time is
approximately equal to the background counting  time.
Notes
1.  Metricel  is a trademark of Gelman  Sciences  Inc., Ann Arbor, MI.
2.  Standardization of lodate Carrier.   Pipette 1.0 ml potassium iodate
    (KI03)  carrier into a 50 ml  centrifuge tube containing 10 ml 0.4^
    HN03.   Add 1 ml  1M Ma2S03 and stir  in a water both for 5
    minutes.   Add 1 ml 0.2 M PdCl- to  precipitate and coagulate Pdl-.
    Cool  and  filter through a tared filter membrane.  Dry to constant
    weight  at 70°C, cool and weigh as    PdI2.
                                  1-01-4

-------
References
1.  Krieger,  Herman L., Prescribed Procedures for Measurement of
    Radioactivity in Drinking Water,  EPA-600/4-80-032,  (1980).
2.  Volchok,  H. L. and dePlanque,  G., editors, EML  Procedures Manual,  25th
    Ed., Environmental Measurement Laboratory, U.S.  Department  of  Energy,
    New York.
                                   1-01-5

-------
            RADIOCHEMICAL DETERMINATION OF IODIHE-131 IN MILK

Principle
     The milk  is preserved at sampling  by  adding formalin containing
iodide carrier.   The milk sample is  stirred with anion exchange resin and
the iodine is  eluted from the resin  after  oxidation to 10^ with
hypochlorite solution.   After reduction, the  iodine is extracted into
CCl., reduced  with bisulfite, and back-extracted into water.  The iodine
is then precipitated as Pdlg.  Chemical yield based on added iodine
carrier is determined gravimetrically.  The iodine-131 is measured by
counting in a  low background beta counter.

Special Apparatus
     1.  Metricel DM 800 filter membranes  or  equivalent, 25 mm diameter,
         0.8 micrometer pore size.  See Mote  1.
     2.  Magnetic stirrer and stirring  bars,  6 cm.
     3.  Stainless steel planchets,  5 cm diameter.
     4.  Suction filtering apparatus for 25 mm filter membranes.
     5.  Low background beta counter.
     6.  Separatory funnel,  500 ml capacity.
     7.  Glassware.

Reagents
     1.  Anion exchange resin.   Dowex 1X8, 50-100 mesh, or equivalent,
         Cl"/forrn.  See Note 2.
     2.  Carbon tetrachloride,  reagent  grade.
     3.  Formalin, 37 percent formaldehyde solution,  reagent grade.
     4.  Hydrochloric acid,  12^, 37  percent HC1 reagent.
     5.  Kydroxylamine hydrochloride, reagent grade crystals.
     6.  Iodide carrier, 10  mg  I~/ml.   Dissolve 1.8 g reagent grade Nal
         in 100 ml distilled water.
                                    +2
     7.  Palladium chloride, 10 mg Pd   /ml.   Dissolve 2.0 g PdCl2 2H,0
         in 100 ml distilled water.
                                  1-02-1

-------
     8.  Sodium bisulfite, 1M.  Dissolve 1.04 g of NaHS03 in 10 ml
         distilled water.  Prepare fresh daily.
     9.  Sodium chloride, 2M.  Dissolve 116.9 g NaCl  in 900 ml  distilled
         water and dilute to 1 liter with distilled water.
     10. Sodium hypochlorite, 5 percent (commercial  laundry bleach).

Preservation of Milk Sample
     Add 80 ml formalin containing 2 ml of iodide carrier to four liters
of milk.  Add 5 drops of freshly prepared 1N[ NaHS03 to each four liter
sample.

Procedure
     1.  Pour a 4 liter milk sample into a 4 liter beaker and add a 50 ml
         volume of anion exchange resin stirred with 20 ml water.
     2.  Place a 6 cm magnetic stirring bar into the beaker and stir
         vigorously for 20 minutes.
     3.  Remove the stirring bar and allow the resin to settle to the
         bottom of the beaker, waiting 20 minutes.
     4.  Carefully decant the milk into a second 4 liter beaker leaving
         the ion exchange resin -behind.  Wash the resin with distilled
         water into a 600 ml beaker and save.
     5.  Place the magnetic stirring bar into the second 4 liter beaker,
         add a second 50 ml water slurry of anion exchange resin to the
         milk and stir vigorously for 20 minutes.
     6.  Remove the stirring bar and wait 20 minutes for the resin to
         settle.
     7.  Carefully decant and discard the milk.
     8.  Wash the second batch of resin into the 600 ml beaker containing
         the resin from step 4.  When the combined resin has settled,
         decant and discard the supernatant water.
     9.  Add 300 ml hot water, 80-90°C, to the combined resin, stir
         briefly, and allow the resin to settle completely.  Decant
                                  1-02-2

-------
    aqueous portion.   Repeat the hot water wash  two more  times.
10.  Add 100 ml  5 percent NaOCl  to the resin.   Place a  2 cm magnetic
    stirring bar in the beaker  and stir vigorously for five minutes
    on a magnetic stirrer.
11.  Filter the  resin slurry through a filter  membrane  into a  1  liter
    beaker and retain the NaOCl solution.  See Note 3.
12.  Transfer resin with 100 ml  5 percent NaOCl to a 200 ml beaker.
    Stir and filter as described in steps 10  and 11.   Discard the
    resin.
13.  Combine the two 100 ml  solutions of NaOCl in the  1 liter  beaker
    and carefully add 40 ml 16M HN03.  See Note  4.
14.  Pour the acidified NaOCl solution into a  500 ml separatory  funnel
    and add 100 ml CC14.
15.  Add 2 g of NH2OH«HC1 and shake.  See Note 5.
16.  Extract the iodine into the CC14 by shaking  the separatory
    funnel for two minutes.  See Note 6.
17.  Drain the lower organic phase into a clean 500 ml  separatory
    funnel and save.
18.  Add 100 ml  CC14 and 1 g NH2OH«HC1 to the aqueous  phase  in
    the separatory funnel and shake the funnel for two minutes.
19.  Combine the organic phases and discard the aqueous phase.
20.  Add 50 ml water and 0.5 ml  of freshly prepared 1M  NaHSOj  to the
    separatory funnel containing the combined CC14 to  reduce  I2.
    to I~ and shake for two minutes.  Discard the lower organic
    phase.  See Mote 7.
21.  Transfer the aqueous phase into a clean 100  ml beaker and add  1
    ml 12M HC1  and 10ml of PdGl2 solution.  Stir to  precipitate
    PdI2 and set aside for five minutes.
22.  Filter with suction through a tared filter membrane using a water
    wash to effect the transfer.
23.  Dry the filter membrane and precipitate for  20 minutes at 110°C
    and weigh to the nearest 0.1 mg.
                             1-02-3

-------
     24.  Mount the filter on  a planchet and count in a low background beta
         counter for 1000 minutes.
     25.  If net count rate is greater than 0.3 counts per minute,  recount
         the sample after eight days to confirm the presence of iodine-131
         by decay.
     26.  Calculate the iodine-131 as piocuries per liter of milk at the
         time of sampling. See Note 8.

Calculations
     Calculate the concentration. Z, of iodine-131 in picocuries per liter
as follows:
                        Z =
                            (2.22){A)(E)(V)(R)
where

     C.    =  gross beta counts per minute,
     CB    =  counter background counts  per minute,
     A     =  decay correction for iodine-131  (half-life = 8.04 days),
     E     =  beta counter efficiency,
     V     =  volume of milk (liters),
     R     =  fractional chemical  yield  based  on weight of PdI2
              recovered, and
     2.22  =  dpm per pCi.

     Calculate the lower limit of detection (LLD) in picocuries per liter
as follows:
                      LLD=     4.66
where                       (2.22)(E)(R)(T)(V)
    C_    = background count rate,
     D

                                  1-02-4

-------
    T   = counting time (same for sample and background),
    E   = beta counter efficiency,
    R   = fractional  chemical  yield based on weight of PdI2,
    V   = sample size (liters), and
    2.22  = dpm per pCi.

    This LLD calculation is valid if the sample counting time is same as
the background counting time.
Notes
1.  Metricel is a trademark of Gelman Sciences, Ann Arbor, MI.
2.  Resin should be treated to remove any fines.  This is accomplished by
    washing with water and allowing the resin to settle for five minutes
    before decanting the water.  Repeat until the fines are removed.
3.  Resin should have a very light straw color after the NaOCl
    extraction.  If not, the NaOCl is not fresh and should be replaced.
4.  Add the acid slowly with stirring until the vigorous reaction
    subsides.  Use a hood for this step, to remove chlorine gas.
5.  Proceed with caution in step 15.  Excessive gas formation during the
    extraction can cause the stopcock or stopper of the separatory funnel
    to disengage with loss of sample.  Start by gently swirling the
    solution to effect mixing.  Invert the separatory funnel with funnel
    stem pointing up.  Relieve the pressure by opening the stopcock and
    repeat this pressure-release step several times during shaking.
6.  Organic phase should be deep red.  If not, shake sample again after a
    few minutes.  Repeat this waiting period, if necessary.
7.  After back extraction into the water, the CC14 should be colorless.
    If not, add additional 1M NaHS03 and re-extract.
8.  Milk samples may contain as much as 3 mg I" which would add to the
    yield.  It may be necessary to determine I" in milk with a  specific
    ion electrode.  Iodide-specific electrodes are available from
    laboratory supply companies.
                                   1-02-5

-------
References
1.  Porter, C.R., and Carter, M.W., Field Method for Rapid Collection of
    Iodine-131 from Milk, Public Health Reports, U.S. Public  Health
    Service, 80, 453-6 (1965).
2.  Thomas, C.W., Determination of Low Concentrations of Iodine-129 and
    Iodine-131 in Milk Samples. Battelle Pacific Northwest Laboratories
    (1974).  Personal  Communication.
3.  Volchok, H. L. and dePlanque, G.,  editors,  EML Procedures Manual, 25th
    Ed., Environmental Measurement Laboratory,  U.S. Department of Energy,
    Hew York.
                                  1-02-6

-------
        RADIOCHEMICAL DETERMINATION OF KRYPTON-8S IN ENVIRONMENTAL
                                AIR  SAMPLES

Principle
     Krypton is separated from other air constituents by passing
approximately one cubic meter of air spiked with 83mKr through a
charcoal  trap at liquid nitrogen temperature and reduced pressure.  The
greater part of the nitrogen and oxygen pass through the trap while
krypton and some of the other noble gases are concentrated.  The remaining
nitrogen is removed by reaction with titanium at elevated temperature.
The noble gases are then transferred to a molecular sieve trap and
cryogenically fractionated.  The krypton is collected on a small amount of
charcoal  and subsequently transferred to a glass liquid scintillation vial
for counting.

Special Apparatus
     1.  Air spiking system (Figure 1).
     2.  Krypton separation system (Figure 2).
     3.  Glass liquid scintillation vials with Teflon valves and Luer
         taper fittings (Figure 3).
     4.  Liquid scintillation counter.
     5.  Large volume heavy duty balloons to hold one cubic meter of air.
         The air spiking system and the krypton separation system are
         constructed with copper tubing and brass ferrule-type fittings.

     The only glass in the systems are the flow meters, Dewar flasks, and
the liquid scintillation vials.  Trap I is a 300 ml stainless-steel sample
cylinder filled with 0.3 mm dia. activated coconut charcoal.  Trap II is a
70 cm length of 1.9 cm O.D. stainless steel pipe filled with 3 mm dia.
titanium sponge.  Trap III is a 345 cm length of 0.95 cm O.D. copper
tubing filled with 0.3 mm dia. activated coconut charcoal.  Trap IV is a
15 cm length of 0.5 cm O.D. copper tubing filled with 0.3 mm dia.
activated coconut charcoal.

                                  Kr-01-1

-------
     The    Kr generator (Figure 1) is contained in a 6 cm length  of  0.9
cm (O.D.) copper tubing capped at one end.   83mKr (1.86 h  half-life)  is
the daughter of 83Rb (83 d half life).  Two ml  of a 84Rb solution
                                 83
containing approximately 0.1 mCi   Rb, which has gone through  several
half -lives, is evaporated to dryness in the generator container.   The
container is plugged with cotton to prevent the escape of  rubidium salt
particles during the equilibration procedure.
     The    (r generator, the reference volume (V )  and the  spiking
volume (V ) are all under vacuum, and at equilibrium the activity  in
V  can be calculated from the activity in Vr knowing the ratio  of  the
two volumes.  The purity of the    Kr gas is checked by determining its
half-life in Vp.
     Experimental results have shown that the most accurate  way to
              Q Om
introduce the     Kr spike into the system is to nix the spike  with the
air sample.   Krypton recoveries range from 80 to 90 percent at an average
of 86 percent.

Reagents
     Liquid scintillation cocktail [7.5 g of 2,5-diphenyloxazole (PPO) and
1.5 g of p-Bis (o-methylstyryl) benzene (bis-MSB) per liter  of  p-xylene].
Reflux for approximately 15 minutes before using to  remove dissolved
oxygen.

Procedure— Spiking Air Samples with 83mKr (Figure 1)
     Transfer approximately one cubic meter of air from compressed gas
cylinder to balloon.  The volume may be approximated by measuring  the
circumference of the balloon.

     1.  The    Kr generator will have to be prepared by evacuating to a
         pressure of 5 microns or less at least 24 hours before the
         generator can be used.  Evacuation will remove the     Kr  that
         has been formed and it will take about 24 hours to  regenerate.

                                  Kr-01-2

-------
         To  prepare  the generator, close valves A, 1, 6, and 7, then open
         valves  2, 3,  4, and  5 to vacuum pump number 1.  When the
         evacuation  is completed, close valves 2, 3, 4, and 5.  This
         operation should  only be necessary again whenever the system is
         not operated  over an extended period of time.  Open valves A, 1,
         3,  4, and 5 and evacuate to a pressure of less than five microns
         of  mercury.  Close valves 4 and 5, open valve 2, and allow the
            Kr to equilibrate for about ten minutes.
     2.  Close valves  2, 1, A, and 3.  Open valves 11, 8, 7, 4, and 6 and
         start sample  flow.
     3.  Remove  liquid scintillation vial  (Vr) along with valvfe A and
         fill with liquid  scintillation solution.  (See Note 1 and Note
         2.) Agitate  gently  to  dissolve krypton in mix.
     4.  After the sample  and spike have been transferred to the balloon,
         stop the sample flow and close valves 11, 8, 7, 4, and 6.  The
         sample  is now ready  for introduction into the krypton separation
         system.

Procedure--Separating  Krypton From the Other Air Constituents (Figure 2)

     5.  Cool trap  I with  liquid nitrogen  (LN) 30 minutes before passing
         sample  through.   Start  the spiked sample through trap I by
         opening valves 33, 34,  32, 30, 28, 9, and 11.  Adjust the flow
         rate with needle  valve  C  (approximately ten liters/min.).
         Continue adding liquid  nitrogen to trap I.  While sample is
         passing through trap I, perform steps 7-10.
     6.  Measure the volume of air passing through trap I with a wet test
         meter  that  is connected to the exhaust vent of vacuum pump 2 .
     7.  To  clean trap III, open valves 41, 42, 44, 45, and 47 and heat
         with a  wrap-around furnace for about an hour at 350°C.  Remove
         the heat and  close valves 41, 42, 45, and 47.  Before opening the
         helium  valve, let trap  III cool for approximately 10 minutes.
                                 Kr-01-3

-------
8.  Open valves 43 and 44.  When the helium flow into  trap III  stops,
    close valves 43 and 44.  After trap III cools,  a partial  vacuum
    is formed.  After cleaning trap III, the large  pump is available
    for cleaning trap IV.
9.  To clean trap IV, open valves 21 and 20, and heat  with a  heat gun
    for about 15 minutes.  Remove the heat gun and  close valves 20
    and 21.  Open valves 43, 16, 15, and 13.  After a  few seconds,
    close valve 17 and open valve 18.  When the helium flow into trap
    IV stops, close valves, 18, 16, and 43.
10. About ten minutes before the spiked air sample  has completely
    passed through trap I, open valves 43, 42, 26,  25, 12, and 13 to
    start the helium flow through the thermal conductivity cell
    (TCC).  Adjust the helium flow rate (approximately 3 liters/min.)
    with needle valve D.  With the helium flow rate adjusted, switch
    on the TCC recorder and set recorder baseline.   Then close valves
    13, 12, 25, 26, 42, and 43.
11. After all the spiked sample has been removed from the balloon,
    close valves 11 and 9 and warm the precooler with a heat gun.
    Then close valves 28, 30, and 33.  Open valves 31, 24, 12, and
    13.  Adjust the helium flow to three liters per minute with valve
    D.  Remove LN from trap I and replace with a dry ice-acetone
    slush.  Continue purging for one hour with helium flowing through
    trap I.  Cut off vacuum pump 2.
12. While trap I is being purged, open valves 41 and 40 and heat trap
    II to 900°C.  After several minutes, close valves 40 and 41 but
    continue heating.  Evacuate V$ to less  than 5 microns of
    mercury by opening valves 21, 22, 23, and B.  Cool trap III with
    LN for 20 minutes.
13. When the TCC reading  returns to  near the baseline setting, adjust
    the helium flow to one liter per minute.  Close valves 12 and 13
    and open valves 26, 25, 12, 15,  16, 40, 44, 45, and 46.  Remove
    the dry ice-acetone Dewar from trap I and replace with an
                             Kr-01-4

-------
         electric  wrap-around  furnace and  heat to 350°C to transfer the
         gases  remaining  in  trap  I  to trap III.  After about 20 minutes,
         close  valves  46,  16,  15,  12, and  31.
     14.  Shut off  the  furnace  to  trap II and open valves 38, 36, and 35.
         After  about a minute  close valve  35 and 36.  Continue heating
         trap I for about an hour  at 350°C making sure that it is being
         evacuated by  vacuum pump 2. Later, close connection to pump 2
         and connect to vacuum pump 1.
     15.  Cool trap IV  with LN  and open  valves 43, 44, 45, 27, 25. 12, 15,
         and  17.  Adjust the helium flow to about 100 ml /min.  Remove LN
         from trap III and replace with an ice water bath.  Follow the TCC
         response  and  about  a  minute before the krypton appears close
         valve  17  and  open valves 18 and 19.  After  the krypton has been
         transferred from trap III  to  trap IV, close valves 19, 18, 15,
         12,  25, 27, 45, 44, and  43.  Turn off the TCC recorder.
     16.  To remove the excess  helium from  trap IV close valve 22, open
         valves 20 and 21 and  evacuate  to  less than  5 microns of mercury.
         Close  valve 21 and  open  valves 22, 23 and B.  Remove LN from trap
         IV and cool scintillation vial Vs with the  LN.  Heat trap IV
         with heat gun for five minutes.  Close valves B, 23, and 20.
         Remove LN from the  scintillation  vial and warm to  room
         temperature.   Remove  the scintillation vial along  with valve B
         and fill  with liquid  scintillation solution.  The  time required
         to this point is about four hours.
     17.  Count  V  and  V  for 83mKr to  determine chemical recovery.
         After  the 83mKr has decayed,  count V$ for 85Kr.
Calculations
     Calculate chemical yield using the following equation:
                chemical yield = Vcpm)
                                 Vs(cpm)
                                  Kr-01-5

-------
    Since data are reported  at standard temperature and pressure,  volume
corrections must be made.  From the gas law, pV = RT, R is constant.
Therefore,
                                       1   .
                     V2=V1
                             -T—I  —
                                      2
where

     V2    =  volume at STP,
     V.    s  measured volume in liters (from wet test meter),
     T,    =  standard temperature 273°K,
     T,    =  sample temperature CC  *  273,
     P,    =  measured pressure in mm  of Hg, and
     P9    a  standard pressure, 760 mm of Hg.
Then
85Kr pCi/liter of air at STP =.  Cl "  CB
                             (2.22HEHRKV)
where

     C.    =  beta counts per minute,
     CB    =  background counts per minute,
     E     a  counter efficiency,
     V     =  volume of air (liters),
     R     =  fractional yield based on 83mKr,  and
     2.22  =  dpm/pCi.

     Calculate the lower limit of detection  (LLD) of krypton-85 in
picocuries per liter as follows:
                                  Kr-01-6

-------
                     LLD
                           (2.22){E)(R)(V)(T)
where

     E     =  counter efficiency,
     R     =  fractional yield,
     V     =  volume of air (liters),
     2.22  =  dpm/pCi, and
     T     =  counting time.
Motes
1.  To clean scintillation vials, pump approximately 10 ml of acetone into
    the vials using a 20-ml syringe fitted with a female adapter.  Expel
    acetone into same syringe.  Repeat two more times.  Evacuate vials
    until dry; then heat in oven at 100°C.  Store in a desiccator until
    ready for use.
2.  After injecting vials with 83mKr spike or sample, fill with cooled
    refluxed scintillation mix using a 20-ml syringe fitted with a female
    Luer adapter.
3.  A background count  is obtained for each vial filled with scintillation
    solution.

References
1.  Shuping, R.E., Phillips, C.R., and Moghissi, A.A., "Low Level Counting
    of Environmental Krypton-85 by Liquid Scintillation," Analytical
    Chemistry. 41. 2082-3 (1969).
2.  Moghissi, A.A., and Hupf, H.B., "A Krypton-83m Generator," Int'l J. of
    Applied Rad. and Isotopes, 22, 218-220 (1971).
                                  Kr-01-7

-------
3.  Stevenson, D.L., and Johns, F.B.,  Separation  Technique  for  the
    Determination of Krypton-85 in the Environment;  Rapid Methods for the
    Measuring Radioactivity in the Environment, Proceedings IAEA-SM-148/68
    Vienna 1971.
4.  Curanings, S.L., Shearin, R.L., and Porter, C.R.,  ibid IAEA-SM-148/11.
                                  Kr-01-8

-------
       GLASS LIQUID SCINTILLATION VIAL
             (REFERENCE VOLUME)
 83m
    Kr

GENERATOR
                 SPIKING VOLUME
                       \
                              SAMPLE
TO VACUUM PUMP (1)
                                                    TO Kr SEPARATION SYSTEM
                         TO VACUUM PUMP (2)
                                                              O BRASS BELLOWS VALVE
                                                              0-TEFLON VALVE
                                 Figure 1.  Air spiking system.

-------
                THERMAL
                CONDUCTIVITY CELL   ,
       FLOW METER
               ^^^
     DEWAR FLASK
     ICE WATER COOLED
  FLOW METER

    AIR SAMPLE
    & SPIKE IN
      PRECOOLER
(LIQUID NITROGEN
        COOLED)
                                     TO VACUUM PUMP (2)
                                                                                  GLASS LIQUID SCINTILLATION VIAL
                                                                                  (SAMPLE & SPIKE RECOVERED)
TO VACUUM
PUMP(1)
              VACUUM GAUGE TUBE  '—•
                                                                         LIQUID NITROGEN COOLED
                                        O BRASS BELLOWS VALVE ® NEEDLE VALVE
                                        G- TEFLON VALVE
                                      Figure 2.   Krypton separation system.

-------
A
  VIAL
                                            CAP
               6.4 cm
  2.5
  cm
VALVE
             Figure 3.  Scintillation vial assembly.

                       Kr-01-11

-------
        RADIOCHEMICAL  DETERMINATION  OF  PHOSPHORUS-32  IN FISH MUSCLE

Principle
    The fish muscle is dried and ashed at 550°C.  After wet oxidation, the
ash is solubilized and filtered.  The phosphorus is decontaminated by
passing the solution over anion and cation resins.  Phosphorus is
precipitated as magnesium ammonium phosphate, which is then filtered,
dried to a constant weight, and weighed.  The precipitate is suspended in
a liquid scintillation solution for radioassay.  Aliquots of the solution
are removed for stable phosphorus analysis to determine chemical yield.

Apparatus
    1.  Glass fiber filters, 47 mm.
    2.  Ion exchange columns.  Anion 2 cm internal diameter, 10.5 cm L;
        cation 2.7 cm internal diameter, 17 cm L.
    3.  Liquid scintillation spectrometer.
    4.  Liquid scintillation vials.
    5.  Spectrophotometer and  accessories.
    6.   Suction  filter  apparatus  for 47 mm filters.

Column  Preparation
    Anion  column:  25 ml of Dowex-1  (50-100 mesh).
    Charge with  100 ml  6M HC1  at  a  flow rate of  5 ml/minute.

    Cation column:  75  ml Dowex-50W X  8 (50-100  mesh).
    Charge with  250 ml  1M. HC1  at  a  flow rate of  5 to 10 ml/minute.
    Rinse  with 250 ml distilled H20.

Reagents
    1.   Ammonium chloride, crystalline reagent.
    2.   Ammonium hydroxide,  15M,  NH4OH reagent.
                                   P-01-1

-------
     3.  Ammonium hydroxide,  1IM.  Dilute 67 ml of the NH^OH reagent to 1
         liter with distilled water.
     4.  Ammonium hydroxide,  0.111.  Dilute 6.7 ml of the NH^OH reagent
         to 1 liter with  distilled water.
     5.  Ethanol, 95 percent  reagent.
     6.  Hydrochloric acid, 12M, 37 percent HC1  reagent.
     7.  Hydrochloric acid, 6M_.  Dilute 500 ml of the 37 percent reagent
         grade HC1 to 1 liter with distilled water.
     8.  Hydrochloric acid, 0.111.  Dilute 8.3 ml of the 37 percent reagent
         grade HC1 to 1 liter with distilled water.
     9.  Magnesia mixture.  Dissolve 55 g MgCl2«6H20 in a minimum
         amount of water.  Add  140 g NH4C1 and 350 ml 15M NH4OH.
         Dilute to 1 liter.   Let stand 1 hour, filter, and store in glass
         bottle.
     10. Magnesium chloride.  Reagent grade MgCl2«6H20.
     11. Nitric acid, 16M, 70 percent HN03 reagent.
     12. Oxidation mixture, 10  parts HN03: 1 part HC104: 4 parts
         H2S04.
     13. Perchloric acid, 12f1,  70 percent HC104  reagent.
     14. Scintillation solution.  Aqua Sol or equivalent.  See Note 1.
     15. Sulfuric acid, 18M,  96 percent H2S04 reagent.
Procedure
     1.  Dry up to 450 g fish muscle in a ceramic dish at 200°C for 12
         hours.  Slowly increase temperature to 400°C for a few hours.
         Remove and grind ash to uniformity.  Increase temperature to
         550°C and ash for 24 to 48 hours.
     2.  Transfer ash to a 400 ml beaker.  Dissolve the residue in ceramic
         dish with two 15 ml portions of 16M HNO., and add rinses to
         beaker containing ash.
     3.  Evaporate to 25 ml or until a frothy brown residue is obtained.
                                  P-01-2

-------
4.  In a perchloric add fume hood, add 20 ml of the oxidation
    reagent and evaporate on a hot plate.  (After the HN03 has
    evaporated, dense white HC104 fumes appear and the solution
    changes to a white slurry.  Continue evaporating until all the
    H2S04 has evaporated and the slurry changes to a shiny white
    residue).
5.  Dissolve the residue in 20 ml 6h1 HC1.  Warm on a hot plate.  Stir
    with a glass rod to dissolve all the residue.  Evaporate to near
    dryness.  Add 40 ml 6M HC1 and raise temperature to boiling while
    stirring.
6.  Filter the hot solution through a 47 mm glass fiber filter and
    discard the filter with residue.
7.  Dilute the filtrate to exactly 50 ml with 6M HC1.  Remove two 0.5
    ml portions for stable phosphorus determination.
8.  Transfer the 49 ml solution to an anion exchange column.  Rinse
    sample container with a few ml of 6H HC1 and add to column.  Pass
    sample through at 5 ml/minute.  Collect in 300 ml beaker.
9.  Elute column with two 75 ml portions of 5M HC1.  Collect all
    fractions.  (If interested in Fe determination, elute Fe with 100
    ml 0.1M HC1, followed by 25 ml H20).
10. Evaporate column effluents to near dryness.  When salts begin to
    form (- 50 ml volume) turn heat to low to prevent bumping.
11. Dissolve the residue in 50 ml of 0.1M HC1 by heating and
    stirring.  Raise the temperature to boiling.  Filter through
    glass fiber filter and discard filter with residue.
12. Pass sample through cation exchange column at 5-10 ml/minute.
    Elute column with two 75 ml aliquots of HgO.  Collect the
    effluents and evaporate to 100 ml volume.  Take two 0.5 ml
    samples for stable phosphorus yield measurement.
13. Precipitate the phosphorus as MgNH4P04 by adding 100 ml of
    magnesia mixture.  Cool in an ice bath.  Add a few more ml
    magnesia mixture to check completeness of precipitation.
                             P-01-3

-------
    14.  Filter and collect  precipitate on 47 mm glass fiber filter.   Wash
        successively with 0.1M  MH4OH and ethanoT.  Place filter paper in
        tared Coors crucible.
    15.  Dry in 100-120 *C oven for one hour.  Cool, weigh, then place
        filter paper and  precipitate in a glass scintillation vial.   This
        will nearly fill the vial; then add scintillation solution,  a
        little at a time, until the precipitate is suspended and the vial
        is full (shoulder of vial).
    16.  Count in liquid scintillation counter for desired amount of time.

Calculations
    Calculate the concentration, Z. of phosphorus-32 in picocuries per
gram as follows:

                        Z .     Cl - CB
                            (2.22(E)(Y)(W)(D)

where

     C,    =  sample count rate,
     CD    =  background count rate,
      D
     E     =  counting efficiency (cpm/dpn),
     Y     =  chemical yield - colorimetric analyses of  phosphorus in the
              aliquots of steps 7 and 12,  if  no  loss occurs  in  later steps,
     W     =  weight of fish sample in grams,
                                -0.693(d)
     D     =  decay factor =  e   *     when d  =  days between
              sample collection and phosphorus-32  counting,  and
     2.22  =  dpm/pCi

     Calculate the lower limit of detection (LLD)  of phosphorus-32 in
picocuries per gram as follows:
                                  P-01-4

-------
                    LLD=       4.66 VCBT
                          (2.22)(E)(Y)(W)(D){T)
where
     Cn    =  background count rate,
      D
     T     =  counting time,
     E     =  counting efficiency,
     Y     =  chemical yield,
     W     =  weight of fish  (grams),
                                -0.693(d)
     D     =  decay factor =   e         when d  =  days between
              sample collection and phosphorus-32  counting, and
     2.22  =  dpm/pCi.


     This LLD calculation is  valid if the  sample counting time is equal to

the background counting time.
Notes
1.   Aqua Sol is a product of Hew England Nuclear Corp.,  Boston, MA.

References
1.   Krieger, H.L., and Gold, S.  Procedures for Radiochemical Analysis of
     Nuclear Reactor Aqueous Solutions.  EPA-R4-73-014,  National
     Environmental Research Center, U.S. Environmental  Protection  Agency,
     Cincinnati, Ohio (May 1973).
                                  P-01-5

-------
   COLORIMETRIC  DETERMINATION  OF  STABLE  PHOSPHORUS  IN BIOLOGICAL SAMPLES

Principle
     An aliquot of dissolved ash is evaporated to fumes of perchloric acid
to remove fluoride and reducing agents.   Ammonium vanadate and ammonium
molybdate are added and a yellow molybdovanadophosphoric acid complex is
formed which obeys Beer's law.  The intensity of the yellow complex is
measured with a colorimeter at a wave length of 400 nm.  The phosphorus
content of the sample is determined by comparison of its absorbance with
that of a series of phosphorus standards.

Special Apparatus
     1.  Colorimeter or spectrophotometer, operable at 400 nm.
     2.  Absorption cells, 1 cm light path.
     3.  Glassware.

Reagents
     1.  Ammonium molybdate, 0.16M Mo.  Dissolve 28.1 g reagent grade
         (NH4)6 Mo7024»4H20 in distilled water and dilute to
         1 liter.
     2.  Ammonium vanadate, 0.02M V.  Dissolve 1.17 g reagent grade
         NH4V03 in a mixture of 17 ml 12M HC104 and 400 ml
         distilled  water and dilute to 500 ml.
     3.  Perchloric acid, 12M, 70 percent HC104 reagent.
     4.  Sodium chloride.  NaCl reagent crystals.
     5.  Standard phosphorus  solution, 0.1 mg P/ml.  Dissolve 0.439 g
         KH2P04 in distilled water and  dilute to 1 liter.

Procedure
     1.  Pi pet  an aliquot of  dissolved  ash which contains 0.1- 1.0 mg of
         phosphorus into a 150 ml beaker.  Add 5.0 ml of 12M perchloric
         acid and evaporate to dense white fumes on a hot plate.  See Note
         1,
                                  P-02-1

-------
     2.   Cool  the solution and transfer with H^O to a 100 ml volumetric
         flask.  Add 10.0 ml  of NH4V03 solution and 25.0 ml of
         (NH4)gMo7024 solutioru  Dilute to volume and mix well.
     3.   Set the colorimeter  or spectrophotometer at a wave length of
         400 nm and measure the cell blanks with a reagent blank prepared
         in the same manner as the  sample.  See Note 2.
     4.   Measure the absorbance (A$) of the sample against the reagent
         blank.
     5.   Carry 1.0, 2.0,  3.0,, 5.0, and 10.0 ml aliquots of the standard
         phosphorus solution  through the  procedure.  Calculate an
         absorbance index (ag) for  each aliquot by dividing its
         absorbance by the weight of phosphorus in milligrams.  The
         average of these absorbance indices is used to calculate the
         phosphorus content of the  sample.  See Note 3.

Calculations
     Calculate the concentration, Z, of phosphorus in the  sample in grams
per kilogram as follows:

                        ,      (A - BMCHD)
                            (E)(F)(G)(H)(1000)
where

     A = absorbance (A),
     B = cell blank,
     C = sample volume in liters,
     D = weight of total ash,
     E = absorbance index (as),
     F = sample aliquot in liters,
     G = weight of ash dissolved in grams,  and
     H = weight of sample in kilograms.
                                  P-02-2

-------
Notes
1.  If the sample Is suspected to contain dichromate,  1  gram of  NaCI  is
    added to the solution in Step 1.   If red fumes  of  chromyl chloride
    appear, rinse down the sides of the beaker and  evaporate to  fumes
    again.  Repeat until  fumes of chromyl chloride  are no longer
    observed.  Continue the procedure with Step 2.
2.  The slit width is adjusted so that the reagent  blank reads  100 percent
    transmission.  The cell blanks are determined by filling each cell
    with the reagent blank and measuring its relative  absorbance.  The
    cell with the lowest blank is used as a reference  cell when measuring
    the absorbance of the sample.
3.  At least three standards should be run with each set of samples and  an
    absorbance index calculated.  This should be used  to calculate: the
    phosphorus content of samples.

References
1.  Cee, A. and Deitz, V. R., "Determination of Phosphate by Differential
    Spectrophotometry." Analytical Chemistry 25, 1320 (1953).
2.  Quinlan, K. P., and DeSesa, M. A., "Spectrophotometric Determination
    of Phosphorus by Molybdovanadophosphoric Acid," Analytical  Chemistry
    27, (1955).
                                  P-02-3

-------
                  RAUIOCHEMICAL DETERMINATION OF LEAD-210
                        IN WATER AND SOLID SAMPLES

Principle
     Bismuth and lead carriers are added to a measured sample  aliquot.
The lead is separated as a lead bromide complex by solvent  extraction with
Aliquat 336 in toluene.  Bismuth is separated from the lead as bismuth
oxychloride and bismuth-210 is measured in a low-background beta  counter
after suitable ingrowth.  The chemical  recovery of lead is  measured  using
an atomic absorption spectrophotometer.  Bismuth recovery is measured
gravi metrically.

Special Apparatus
     1.  Atomic absorption spectrophotometer with lead lamp.
     2.  Separatory funnels, 250ml capacity.
     3.  Combination magnetic stirrer and hot plate.
     4.  Low background beta counter with 7 mg/cm  window.
     5.  Centrifuge, tal>le model.
     6.  Suction filter apparatus.
     7.  Filter paper, Whatman 42 or equivalent, 55_ mm dia. cut to fit  47
         mm suction filter apparatus.

Reagents
     1.  Aliquat 336, methyltricaprylammonium chloride, General Mills
         Chemical Co.
     2.  Aliquat 336, 30 percent in toluene. Mix 300 ml of Aliquat  336
         with 700 ml of toluene.  Just prior to use,  wash solution twice
         with equal volume of 1.5 M HBr.
     3.  Ammonium hydroxide, 15 M_.
     4.  Bixmuth carrier, 10 mg.B1+2/ml.  Dissolve 23.2 g Bi(N03)2»5H20
         in 0.8 M HN03 and dilute to 1 liter with 0.8 M HN03.
     5.  Ethanol, 95 percent reagent.
                                  Pb-01-1

-------
     6.  Hydrobromic acid,  9 M.   48 percent HBr reagent.
     7.  Hydrobromic add,  3 M.   Dilute  333 ml of the 48 percent HBr to 1
         liter with distilled water.
     8.  Hydrobromic acid,  1.5 M.  Dilute  167 ml of the 48 percent HBr to
         1 liter with distilled  water.
     9.  Hydrobromic acid,  0.1 M.  Dilute  11 ml of the 48 percent HBr to 1
         liter with distilled water.
     10. Hydrochloric acid, 12 M.  37 percent HC1 reagent.
     11. Hydrochloric acid, 8 M.  Dilute 667 ml of the 37 percent HC1
         reagent to 1 liter with distilled water.
     12. Hydrogen peroxide, 50 percent H709 reagent.
                               +2
     13. Lead carrier, 20 mg Pb   /ml.  Dissolve 32.0 g lead nitrate in
         0.8 M HN03 and dilute to 1 liter  with 0.8 M HNOj.
     14. Lead standard solution, 1000 ppm  Pb.  Commercially available
         certified standard.
     15. Nitric acid, 16 M.  71  percent  HN03 reagent.
     16. Nitric acid, 0.8 M.  Dilute 50  ml of the 71 percent HM03
         reagent to 1 liter with distilled water.
     17. Perchloric acid, 12 M,  70 percent HC104 reagent.
     18. Toluene, reagent grade.

Sample Preparation (solid sample)
     1.  Add 1 ml lead carrier to weighed  aliquot of sample in beaker.
     2.  Add 50 ml 16 M HN03 and 5 ml 50 percent H202 and digest
         until sample has dissolved.
     3.  Evaporate sample just to dry ness  and add 100 ml 3 M^ HBr and cool
         to room temperature.

Sample Preparation (water sample)
     1.  Add 1 ml lead carrier and 5 ml  16 M HN03 to a liter water
         sample.  Evaporate to about 100 ml.
     2.  Add 100 ml 16 £1 HM03 to sample  and evaporate to dryness.
                                  Pb-01-2

-------
     3.  Add 25 ml 3 M HBr to sample and evaporate to dryness.
     4.  Add 100 ml of 3 M^ HBr to residue, heat to dissolve, and cool  to
         room temperature.

Procedure
     1.  Transfer the sample 1n 3 M HBr solution to a 250 ml separatory
         funnel containing 75 ml of washed Aliquat 336.
     2.  Shake for 30 seconds.  Let separate and discard the aqueous phase.
     3.  Wash the organic phase three times with 50 ml  aliquots of 0.1 fl
         HBr and discard all washes.
     4.  Strip the lead from the organic phase by shaking twice for 30
         seconds with 50 ml aliquots of 12 M HC1.
     5.  Combine the strip solutions in a 400 ml beaker and add 100 mlf of
         16 n HN03.
     6.  Evaporate the solution just to dryness.
     7.  Add 5 ml of 8 M HC1 and 5 ml of 12 M HC104 to the residue from
         step 6 and heat to dryness.
     8.  Add 10 ml of 16 M^ HN03 to the sample and heat to dryness.
     9.  Add 10 ml of 12 t4 HC1 to the sample and heat to dryness.
     10. Add 10 ml of 16 M HN03 and 10 ml of 12 ri HC1 and heat until
         volume is reduced to approximately 10 ml.

First Milking
     1.  Add 1 ml of bismuth carrier to sample and transfer to a 40 ml
         centrifuge tube with a distilled water rinse.
     2.  Adjust pH of sample to 8 with 15 ri NH4OH.
     3.  Heat  the sample with stirring in a hot water bath.
     4.  Cool  and centrifuge.  Discard the supernate.
     5.  Dissolve the precipitate by first suspending in 5  drops of 12 M
         HC1.  Add 5 to 10 ml of distilled water to dissolve the
         precipitate.
     6.  Add 40 ml water and heat with constant stirring.
                                  Pb-01-3

-------
     7.  Cool, centrifuge, and reserve the supernate  in a  250 ml  beaker.
     8.  Repeat steps 5 through 7 twice more,  combining the  supernates.
         Discard the precipitate, record the time and date for  ingrowth of
         bismuth-210.  See Note 1.
     9.  Add 1 ml of bismuth carrier and 3 to 5 ml  of 12 M HC1  to the
         combined supernates.  Reduce the volume to less than 100 ml.
     10. Cool, transfer to a 100 ml  volumetric flask  and bring  to volume.
     11. Dilute 1 ml of sample to 10 ml in a 10 ml  volumetric flask.
     12. Determine the recovery of lead carrier by measuring the  sample in
         the 10 ml volumetric flask on an atomic absorption
         spectrophotometer at 283 nm.  .See Note 2.
     13. Allow 2 to 3 weeks for ingrowth of bismuth-210 into the  main
         portion of the sample (step 10).

Second Milking
     1.  Transfer the solution from the 100 ml volumetric  flask to a  250
         ml beaker and evaporate to about 15 ml.
     2.  Transfer to a 40 ml centrifuge tube and adjust the  pH  to 8 with
         15 fl NH4OH.  Centrifuge and discard the supernate.
     3.  Dissolve the precipitate by suspending in 5  drops of 12  fl HC1  and
         adding 5 to 10 ml H20.  Bring volume of sample to 40 ml  with
         water.  Record the time and date for decay of bismuth-210.
     4.  Heat with constant stirring in a hot water bath.  Cool and
         centrifuge.  Reserve the supernate for additional lead-210
         analysis.
     5.  Dissolve the precipitate by first suspending in 5 drops  of 12  M^
         HC1.  Add 5 to 10 ml of water to complete solution. Dilute  the
         sample to 40 ml with water.
     6.  Heat in a hot water bath with constant stirring.  Cool and
         centrifuge.  Combine the supernate with that from step 4.
     7.  Dissolve the precipitate as in step 5 and dilute  with  40 ml  of
         water.
                                  Pb-01-4

-------
     8.    Heat in a hot water bath with constant stirring.   Cool,  filter
           with suction on a weighed 2.5 cm filter membrane.
     9.    Wash the precipitate with water and ethanol  and  dry  the
           precipitate for 30 minutes at 110 *C.
     10.   Cool and weigh the precipitate.
     11.   Count the sample using a low background beta counter with  a
                  2
           7 nig/cm  window.  Record the time and date for decay of
           bismuth-210.
     12.   Standardize the counter with a known amount of lead-210  from
           which bismuth-210 has been separated and prepared  in the same
           way as the sample.

Calculations
     Calculate the concentration, Z. of lead-210 in picocuries  per
milliliter or gram as follows:
                          Z.
where
     C     =  cpm (net),
     E     =  eff,
     A     =  amount of sample (ml or g),
     P     =  chemical yield of lead (determined by AA),
     B     =  chemical yield of bismuth (determined gravimetrically by
              weight of BiOCl),
                            210
     I     =  ingrowth of Bi    (time from 1st milking to 2nd milking),
                         210
     D     =  decay of BI    (time of separation 2nd milking in step 3
              to midpoint of counting time), and
     2.22  =  dpm/pCi.
                                  Pb-01-5

-------
     Calculate the lower limit of detection  (LLD)  for  lead-210 in
picocuries per milliliter or gram as follows:
                  LLD =
                           4.66V CBT
where
CB
T
E
2.22
P
B
I
D
A
              background count rate (c/m),
              counting time (minutes),
              counter efficiency,
              dpm/pCi,
              chemical yield of lead (AA determination),
              chemical yield of bismuth (gravimetric),
              ingrowth of bismuth-210,
              decay of bismuth-210, and
              amount of sample (ml  or g).
Motes
1.  If the need arises for a fast indication  of the  amount of  lead-210 in
    a sample, the precipitate in step 8 of the  first milking can be saved
    on a tared filter and counted for bismuth-210.   If  the sample  in
    question has been collected for over 21 days, the results  are
    compatible with final results.
2.  The calibration curve should have a working range of 0 to  50 ppm.

References
1.  Volchok, H. L.  and dePlanque, G., editors,  EML Procedures  Manual, 25th
    Ed., Environmental Measurement Laboratory,  U.S.  Department of  Energy,
    New York.
2.  Petrow, H.G., and Cover A., "Direct Radiochemical Determination of
    Lead-210 in Bone," Analytical Chemistry 37, 1659 (1965).
                                  Pb-01-6

-------
               RADIOCHEMICAL DETERMINATION OF PROMETHIUM-147
                       IN AQUEOUS AND URINE  SAMPLES

Principle
     Neodymium carrier is added to a measured  sample  aliquot.  The rare
earths are separated by passing the sample over anion exchange resin.
Promethiun-147 is precipitated with the rare earth carrier  as an oxalate.
After wet ashing, the oxalate is reprecipitated and dissolved in EOTA.
The solution is mixed with a liquid scintillation solution  and the
promethium-147 is radioassayed in a liquid scintillation counter.

Special Apparatus
     1.  Liquid scintillation counter at ambient temperature operation.
         See Mote 1.
     2.  Low background counting vials, 25 ml  capacity.  See Mote 2.
     3.  Ion exchange columns 3.2 cm I.D., 17  cm length.
     4.  Centrifuge.
     5.  Filter membrane, Mi Hi pore HAWP, 25 mm dia.  or equivalent.  See
         Note 3.
     6.  Suction filter apparatus for 25 ram  filter membrane.

Reagents
     1.  Ammonium hydroxide, 15 M.  NH^OH reagent.
     2.  Anion exchange resin.  Oowex 1 X 8  or equivalent,  100-200 mesh,
         chloride form.
     3.  Aqua regia.  Four parts 12 M HC1; one part 15 M HNOj by
         volume.  Prepare immediately before use.
     4.  p-Bis (o-methylstyryl) benzene (bis MSB).
     5.  Citric acid, crystalline reagent.
     6.  Citric acid, 1 M pH 4.5.  Dissolve  192 g citric acid in 750 ml
         distilled water and adjust to pH 4.5  with careful  addition of 15
         M NH4OH  using pH meter.  Dilute to 1  liter  with distilled
         water.
                                 Pm-01-1

-------
     7.  Citric acid,  .01  M.   Dilute 5 ml of the 1 M citric acid solution
         to 500 ml  with distilled water.
     8.  2,5-Diphenyloxazole  (PRO).
     9.  Disodiurn ethylenediamine tetraacetic acid, 9 percent.  Dissolve
         90 grams reagent  grade  Ma2EDTA in 800 ml distilled water and
         dilute to 1 liter.
     10. Ethanol, 95 percent  reagent.
     11. Hydrochloric  acid, 12 M.  37 percent HC1 reagent.
     12. Hydrochloric  acid, 3 M.  Dilute 250 ml of the 37 percent HC1
         reagent to 1  liter with distilled water.
     13. Neodymium carrier, 10 mg Nd*3/ml.  Dissolve 23.3 g high purity
         Nd203 in 83 mi 12 M  HC1 and dilute to 1 liter with distilled
         water.  Standardize  by  preparing neodymium oxalate precipitates
         for weighing.
     14. Nitric acid,  15 M.   70  percent HN03 reagent.
     15. Oxalic acid,  1 M. Dissolve 126 g H2C204 • 2H20 in 700 ml
         distilled water and  dilute to 1 liter with distilled water.
     16. Scintillation solution.  Dissolve 7.0 g of 2,5-diphenyloxazole
         (PRO) and 1.5 g of p-bis  (o-methylstyryl) benzene (bis MSB) in 1
         liter of p-xylene.   Mix this solution with Triton M101 in a
         volume ratio  of 2.75 parts of p-xylene solution to 1 part of
         Triton MIDI.   The correct volume of Triton M101 is 364 ml for
         each liter of p-xylene.  Store the solution in a brown bottle and
         protect from sunlight.
     17. Triton N101,  Rohm and Haas Co., Philadelphia, PA.  See Note 4.
     18. p-Xylene,  scintillation grade reagent.
Procedure
     1.  Add 1 ml of the neodymium carrier to 10 ml of 1 M citric acid.
     2.  Add the above mixture to  1 liter of water sample or to 1 liter of
         filtered urine with  stirring.  Adjust pH of sample to 4.5.
                                 Pm-01-2

-------
3.  Slurry 100 ml of am'on exchange resin with water and add to
    column.  Wash resin with 400 ml  3 M HC1.
4.  Replace acid on column with distilled water until pH of eluate is
    greater than 4.
5.  Charge column with 200 ml 1 M citric acid, pH 4.5.
6.  Wash column with 200 ml 0.01 M citric acid.
7.  Pass urine or water sample through column at a flow rate of 10
    ml/minute.
8.  Pass 200 ml of 0.01 M citric acid through column at a flow rate
    of 10 ml/minute.
9.  Pass 400 ml of 3 M^HC1 through column.  Begin with a flow rate of
    2 to 3 ml per minute.  Discard first 30 ml of effluent and
    collect next 150 ml in a 250 ml  centrifuge bottle.  Remainder-of
    acid can flow through more rapidly and can be discarded.
10. Replace acid on column with water until pH of eluate is greater
    than 4.  Column is ready for next sample beginning with step 5.
11. Add 5 ml 1 M oxalic acid to the 150 ml of column eluate in the
    centrifuge bottle.
12. Adjust pH to 1.7 using 15 M NH4OH with stirring.
13. Cool contents of centrifuge bottle in an ice bath for 30 minutes
    and centrifuge.
14. Discard supernate and transfer precipitate to a 40 ml centrifuge
    tube and centrifuge.  Discard supernate.
15. Wash precipitate with 5 ml water and centrifuge.
16. Transfer precipitate to a 100 ml beaker using distilled water.
17. Evaporate contents of beaker just to dryness and add 10 ml of
    aqua regia.
18. Evaporate sample to dryness and repeat steps 17 and 18.
19. Add 10 ml 3 M HC1 to beaker and stir to dissolve residue.
20. Transfer contents to a 40 ml centrifuge tube, washing beaker with
    3 M HC1, bringing volume in tube to approximately 30 ml.
                             Pm-01-3

-------
     21.  Add 2 ml  1 M^ oxalic acid to centrifuge tube and adjust pH  to  1.7
         using 15  M NH4OH.
     22.  Cool  contents in ice bath for 30 minutes  and centrifuge.   Discard
         supernate.
     23.  Wash precipitate with 5 ml  distilled water  and centrifuge.
         Discard supernate.
     24.  Filter precipitate on weighed filter membrane.
     25.  Wash precipitate with 10 ml each of water and ethanol.
     26.  Allow precipitate to dry in desiccator and  weigh.
     27.  Transfer precipitate and filter membrane  to 50 ml  beaker.
     28.  Add 5 ml  9 percent di sodium EDTA to beaker.  Heat gently  to
         dissolve precipitate.
     29.  Transfer solution to scintillation vial,  washing beaker with  5 ml
         distilled water which is also put into vial.
     30.  Add 15 ml of scintillation solution and shake vial  to mix
         contents.
     31.  Place vial in liquid scintillation counter  and allow sample to
         dark adapt for two hours before counting.
     32.  Count sample for at least 100 minutes.  See Note 5.

Calculations
     Calculate the concentration. Z, of promethium-147 in picocuries per
liter as follows:
                         Z-
                              (2.22)(E)(V)(W)
where

     C^    =  gross counts per minute,
     CB    =  background counts per minute,
     S     =  standard weight of neodymium oxalate (mg),
                                  Pm-01-4

-------
     2.22  =  dpn/pCI,
     E     =  counter efficiency,
     V     =  sample volume (liters), and
     U     =  weight of precipitate (ing).

     Calculate the lower limit of detection (LLD) in picocuries per liter
as follows:
                                4.66V C.J
                            (2.22)(E)(R)(V)(T)
where

     CB    =  background counts per minute,
     T     =  counting time,
     2.22  =  dpm/pCi,
     E     =  counting efficiency,
     R     =  fractional sample recovery, and
     V     =  sample volume (liters).

     This LLD calculation is valid if the sample counting time is same as
the background counting time.
Notes
1.  For optimum performance of the scintillation solution, the temperature
    at which the counting instrument is kept should be between 18 and 25°C.
2.  Low potassium glass or plastic vials should be used to minimize
    background counts.  Plastic vials should be resistant to the
    scintillation solution.  The solvent, p-xylene, will migrate through
    the plastic vials, therefore the samples should be counted no longer
    than three days after preparation.
                                  Pm-01-5

-------
3.  MilHpore Is a registered tradename of Milllpore  Corp., Bedford, MA.
4.  Triton N101 Is a tradename for a nonylphenol  polyethylene glycol ether.
5.  Settings on the liquid scintillation counter  should  be  such  as  to
                                                                1 A j
    minimize the background count rate.  A standard solution of     Pm
    should be used to tag at least six neodymium oxalate precipitates  as
    described in this procedure fn order to determine counting  efficiency
    of the instrument at the desired setting.

 References
 1.  Ludwick, J. D.,  "Liquid Scintillation Counting of Promethium-147,
    Bioassay Procedure," Analytical  Chemistry 36.  1104-1106 (1964).
                                  Pm-01-6

-------
        RADIOCHEMICAL DETERMINATION  OF PROMETHIUM-147 IH FECES ASH

                               Rapid Method

Principle
     The weighed feces sample is ashed at 550°C  for 72 hours.  Neodymium
carrier is added and the ash is dissolved in acid.  The rare earths are
precipitated as oxalate, which is dissolved in EDTA and radioassayed by
liquid scintillation counting.

Special Apparatus
     1.  Liquid scintillation counter at ambient temperature operation.
         See Mote 1.
     2.  Low background counting vials,  25 ml capacity.  See Note 2.
     3.  Filter membranes, Millipore HAWP, 25 mm dia. or equivalent.  See
         note 3.
     4.  Suction filter apparatus for 25 mm filter membrane.
     5.  Centrifuge.

Reagents
     1.  Ammonium hydroxide, 15 M_.  HH^OH reagents.
     2.  Ammonium oxalate, crystalline  reagent.
     3.  Ammonium oxalate, 0.5 M.  Dissolve 62 g (NH4)2C204 in 800
         ml distilled water with stirring while  wanning.   Dilute to 1
         liter with distilled water.  Solution should be saturated at room
         temperature.
     4.  p-Bis (o-methylstyryl) benzene  (bis MSB).
     5.  2,5-Diphenyloxazole (PRO).
     6.  Disodium ethylenediamine tetraacetic acid, 9 percent.  Dissolve
         90 g reagent grade Ma2 EDTA in  800 ml distilled water and
         dilute to 1 liter with distilled water.
     7.  Ethanol, 95 percent reagent.
                                  Pm-02-1

-------
     8.   Hydrochloric acid, 12 M.  37 percent HCl reagent.
     9.   Neodymium carrier, 10 mg Hd+3/ml.  Dissolve 23.3 g high purity
         Nd203  in 83 ml  12 M HCl and dilute to 1 liter with distilled
         water.  Standardize by preparing neodymium oxalate precipitates
         for weighing.
     10.  Scintillation solution.  Dissolve 7.0 g of 2,5-diphenyloxazole
         (PRO)  and 1.5 g of p-bis (o-methystyryl) benzene (bis MSB) in 1
         liter  of p-xylene.  Mix this solution with Triton H101 in a
         volume ratio of 2.75 parts p-xylene solution to 1 part Triton
         N101.   The correct volume of Triton H101 is 364 ml for each liter
         of p-xylene.  Store the solution in a brown bottle and protect
         from sunlight.
     11.  Triton MIDI, Rohm and Haas Co., Philadelphia, PA.  See Mote 4.
     12.  p-Xylene, scintillation grade reagent.
Procedure
     1.   Ash the feces sample at 550° C for 72 hours.
     2.   Weigh out 1  g cooled ash into a 100 ml beaker.
     3.   Pipette 1.0  ml neodymium carrier into beaker.
     4.   Add 5 ml of  12 M HCl and heat to near boiling.  Dilute with 30 ml
         distilled water and heat to boiling.
     5.   Cool sample  to room temperature and centrifuge.
     6.   Decant supernate into a 1 liter beaker and dilute to 250 ml with
         distilled water.
     7.   Adjust pH of solution between 1.4 and 1.7.  Add 5 ml 0.5 fl
         ammonium oxalate and stir vigorously for 30 minutes.
     8.   Filter precipitate through a weighed filter membrane.  Wash
         precipitate  with distilled water and ethanol.
     9.   Dry the precipitate at 100°C and weigh to determine recovery.
     10. Dissolve the precipitate in 5 ml 9 percent disodium EDTA and
         transfer to  a scintillation vial using 5 ml distilled water to
         transfer the solution.
                                 Pm-02-2

-------
     11.   Add 15 ml  scintillation  solution mix and place vial in liquid
           scintillation counter.
     12.   Allow vial  to dark adapt for  two hours before counting.  Count
           sample for 100 minutes.

Calculations
     Calculate the concentration, Z, of  promethium-147 in picocuries per
gram ash as follows:
                             (2.22)(E)(W)(P)
where

     C.    =  gross counts per minute,
     CB    =  background counts per minute,
     S     =  standard weight of neodymium oxalate  (mg),
     2.22  =  dpm/pCi,
     E     =  counting efficiency,
     W     =  weight of ash (grams), and
     P     =  weight of precipitate (mg).

     Calculate the lower limit of detection (LLD)  for promethium-147  in
picocuries per gram ash as follows:
                      LLD =     4.66 v ^,
                            (2.22)(E)(R)(W)(T)

where

     CD    =  background counts per minute,
       D
     T    =  counting time,
     2.22  =  dpm/pCi,
                                  Pm-02-3

-------
     E     =  counting efficiency,
     R     =  fractional sample recovery, and
     U     =  sample weight (grams).

     This LLD calculation is valid if the sample counting time is  same as
the background counting time.
Notes
1.  For optimum performance of the scintillation solution,  the temperature
    at which the counting instrument is kept should be between 18 and 25°C.
2.  Low potassium glass or plastic vials should be used to  minimize
    background counts.  Plastic vials should be resistant to the
    scintillation solution.  The solvent, p-xylene, will  migrate through
    the plastic vials therefore the samples should be counted no longer
    than three days after preparation.
3.  Millipore is a trademark of the Millipore Corp., Bedford, MA.
4.  Triton N101 is a tradename for a nonylphenol polyethylene glycol  ether.

References
1.  Ludwick, J.D., "Liquid Scintillation Counting of Promethium-147,
    Bioassay Procedure," Analytical Chemistry 36, 1104-1106 (1964).
                                  Pm-02-4

-------
        RADIOCHEMICAL DETERMINATION OF PLUTONIUM IN ASHED SAMPLES.
          SOIL.  COAL, FLY ASH,  ORES, VEGETATION.  BIOTA AND WATER

Principle
     The sample  is ashed at 500° C  for 72 hours or evaporated to a smaller
volume.  Plutonium-242 tracer is added to a weighed or measured aliquot.
The solid sample is solubilized by treatment with HF,  HC104, and HC1.
Plutonium is extracted from an HC1 solution of the sample into a
triisooctylamine (TIOA) solution in p-xylene.  After washing the TIOA with
dilute HC1, the  plutonium is stripped from the TIOA with  dilute HNO-j.
The strip solution is wet ashed and the plutonium is coprecipitated with
0.1 mg lanthanum as fluoride.  The precipitate is filtered on a Nuclepore
membrane and radioassayed by alpha spectroscopy for plutonium.

Special Apparatus
     1.  Nuclepore filter membranes, 25 mm dia.,  0.2 micrometer pore size
         or equivalent.  See Note  1.
     2.  Planchets, stainless steel, 32 mm diameter.
     3.  Plastic graduated cylinder, 100 ml capacity.
     4.  Separatory funnels, 1 liter capacity.
     5.  Suction filter apparatus  for 25 mm membranes.
     6.  Teflon  beakers.  See Note 2.
     7.  Alpha spectrometrie system consisting of multichannel analyzer,
         biasing electronics, printer, silicon surface barrier detector,
         vacuum  pump, and chamber.

Reagents
     1.  Ascorbic acid, reagent.
     2.  Ethanol, 95 percent reagent.
     3.  Hydrochloric acid, 12M, 37 percent reagent.
     4.  Hydrochloric acid, 9M. Dilute 750 ml of the  37  percent reagent
         grade HC1 to 1 liter with distilled water.
                                 Pu-01-1

-------
     5.  Hydrochloric acid,  1M_.  Dilute 83 ml of the 37 percent reagent
        grade  HC1  to 1  liter with distilled water.
     6.  Hydrofluoric acid,  29M, 48 percent reagent.
     7.  Hydrofluoric acid,  3M.  Dilute 104 ml of the 48 percent reagent
        grade  HF to 1 liter with distilled water.  Use a plastic
        graduated  cylinder  and storage bottle.
     8.  Hydrogen peroxide,  50 percent reagent grade.
     9.  Lanthanum  carrier,  0.1 mg La* /ml.  Dissolve 0.0779 g high
        purity La(N03)3»6H20 per 250 ml WHC1.
     10. Nickel  foil, 15 cm  x 1 cm x 0.1 mm.
     11. Nitric acid, 1614, 70 percent reagent.
     12. Nitric acid, O.M.  Dilute 6 ml of the 70 percent reagent grade
        HN03 to 1  liter with distilled water.
     13. Perchloric acid, 12M, 70 percent reagent.
     14. Plutonium-242 tracer solution.  Approximately 1 pCi per ml
        accurately calibrated.
     15. Triisooctylamine (TIOA), reagent grade.  K and K Chemical Div.,
         ICN Pharmaceuticals, Plainview, N.Y.
     16. TIOA solution  in p-xylene, 10 percent.   Dissolve 100 ml
         triisooctylaraine in p-xylene and dilute  to 1 liter with p-xylene.
     17. p-Xylene,  reagent grade.

Sample Preparation  (ashed sample)
     1.   Add 1 g of ashed sample to Teflon  beaker.
     2.   Add measured aliquot of plutonium-242 tracer solution.
     3.  Add 15 ml  of 29M HF and evaporate  to dryness.  Repeat this step
         two more times  to remove silica as SiF^.
     4.   Add 5 ml  of 12H HC104  and  5 ml  of  9M HC1.  Evaporate to
         dryness.   Repeat this  step.
     5.   Add 10 ml  of 12M HC1  and transfer  solution to glass beaker.
         Evaporate to dryness.   Again  add  12M HC1 and evaporate.
     6.   Dissolve sample in warm 9M HC1.   Increase volume of 9M HC1 to  200
         ml.

                                 Pu-01-2

-------
Sample Preparation (water sample)
     1.  Filter the water sample of 1  to 4 liters  through a  fluted filter.
     2.  Add 100 ml of 12M HC1  and a measured aliquot of plutonium-242
         tracer to the filtrate.
     3.  Evaporate the sample to a volume of 200 ml  and add  200 ml of 12M
         HC1.

Procedure
     1.  Add 2 ml 50 percent ^C^, heat gently and set aside for 10
         minutes.  See Note 3.
     2.  Place 100 ml 10 percent TIOA  in a 1 liter separator/ funnel.  Add
         50 ml 9M HC1 and shake for one minute to  equilibrate.
     3.  Drain and discard lower aqueous acid layer after clean separation
         of two phases.
     4.  Add the aqueous sample to the TIOA in the separatory funnel and
         shake the funnel vigorously for two minutes.  Vent  the funnel
         stopcock to prevent pressure  buildup in the funnel.
     5.  Allow the phases to separate  cleanly and  draw off the lower
         aqueous add phase .and discard.
     6.  Add 50 ml of 911 HC1 to the TIOA solution  in the separatory funnel
         and shake for one minute.
     7.  Allow the phases to separate; withdraw and discard  the lower acid
         phase.
     8.  Repeat steps 6 and 7.
     9.  Strip the plutonium from the TIOA solution by adding 100 ml 0.1M
         HN03 to the separatory funnel and shaking the funnel for two
         minutes.
     10. Allow the phases to separate; withdraw and transfer lower acid
         phase to a clean separatory funnel.
     11. Repeat steps 9 and 10 and combine strip solutions  in the clean
         separatory funnel.
                                  Pu-01-3

-------
12. Add 100 ml  p-xylene to the combined  strip  solution and shake
    funnel  for one minute.
13. Allow phases to separate cleanly; withdraw lower acid layer into
    a beaker.
14. Evaporate  combined acid solution from  step 13 to dryness.  Do not
    overheat.
15. Add 10  ml  16M HNO^ to residue and evaporate to dryness.  Do not
    overheat.
16. Add 5 ml 9M^ HC1  and 5 ml 12M HC104 to  residue and evaporate to
    dryness.
17. Repeat  step 16.
18. Add 10  ml  12M HC1  and evaporate to dryness.
19. Repeat step 18.
20. Add 50  ml  1M_ HC1 to sample and warm  gently to dissolve residue.
21. Heat sample solution to 80°C with stirring and add 50 mg ascorbic
    acid.  Do  not overheat.
22. Suspend clean nickel metal strip into  the  solution for two hours
    to remove  polonium.
23. Remove nickel and evaporate the solution to dryness.
24. Add 15 ml  W HC1 to sample residue and warm to approximately  50°C.
25. Add 0.5 ml 50 percent H202, 1 ml  of  lanthanum carrier and 5
    ml of 3f1 HF to precipitate LaF, carrying plutonium.  Mix well
    and set aside for 30 minutes.
26. Using suction, filter coprecipitated sample through  a filter
    membrane.
27. Rinse sample beaker with 10 ml water and add to  filter funnel.
    Rinse beaker with 10 ml ethanol and  add to funnel.
28. Remove clamp and top of funnel with  the suction  on.  Allow
    membrane to dry.
29. Mount membrane carefully on a 32 mm  diameter planchet using
    double stick tape.
30. Count sample for 1000 minutes on an  alpha  spectrometer.
                             Pu-01-4

-------
Calculations
    Calculate the concentration,  Z, of plutom'um in picocuries per gram as
follows:

                      z =       (A-A^fF)
where

     A     =  gross sample counts that appear  in the plutonium-238 or
              plutonium-239 alpha energy  region,
     A.    =  background counts in the same alpha energy region and time
              period as A^ above,
     B     =  gross tracer counts which appear 1n the alpha energy region
              of the tracer isotope,
     B.    =  background counts in the same alpha energy region and time
              period as ]3 above,
     E      = alpha detector efficiency,
     F      = total calibrated tracer counts for same counting time as
              sample counts,
     W      = sample weight (grams or volume In liters),
     T      = counting time (minutes), and
     2.22  =  dpm per pd.

     Calculate the lower limit of detection (LLD) 1n picocuries per gram
or liter as follows:
                      LLD
                            (2.22){E)(R)(W)(T)

where

     A.    =  background count rate,

                                 Pu-01-5

-------
     T     =  counting time (same for sample and background),
     E     =  alpha detector efficiency,
     R     =  fractional  yield (B-Bj/F in  calculation),
     W     =  sample weight (grams or volume liters), and
     2.22  =  dpm per pCi.

     This LLD calculation is valid if the  sample counting time is same as
the background counting time.
Notes
1.  Nuclepore is a registered trademark of Nuclepore Corp., Pleasanton, CA.
2.  Teflon is a registered trademark of DuPont  Co, Wilmington, DE.
3.  Hydrogen peroxide stabilizes the H plutonium valence  necessary  for
    maximum extraction in the TIOA.

References
1.  Moore, F.L., "Liquid-Liquid Extraction of Uranium and  Plutonium  from
    Hydrochloric acid Solution with  Tri (iso-octyl) amine," Analytical
    Chemistry 30. 908 (1958).
2.  Volchok, H. L. and dePlanque, G., editors,  EML Procedures Manual,  25th
    Ed., Environmental Measurement Laboratory,  U.S. Department of  Energy,
    New York.
3.  Johns, F.B., et al., Radiochemical Analytical Procedures for Analysis
    of Environmental Samples, EMSL-LV-0539-17,  U.S. E.P.A., Las Vegas, NY,
    (1979).
                                  Pu-01-6

-------
               PREPARATION OF PLUTONIUM-236 TRACER  SOLUTION

Principle
     Plutonium-236 has a half-life of 2.85 years  and decays  to
uranium-232.   In order to prevent contamination of  samples with
uranium-232 and its decay products, any stock of  piutonium-236 must  be
periodically decontaminated before use.  This should be  done every 90 days.
     Plutonium-236 is extracted into tri1soocty1 amine  (TIOA). The
Plutonium is stripped from the TIOA with a mixture  of  HC1  and HF  and then
wet ashed.  Aliquots of the cleaned plutonium tracer are copredpitated
with lanthanum fluoride and radioassayed by alpha spectroscopy to
determine the specific activity of the tracer solution.

Special Apparatus
     1.  Nuclepore filter membranes, 25 mm dia.,  0.2 micrometer  pore size
         or equivalent.  See Note 1.
     2.  Planchets, stainless steel, 32 mm diameter.
     3.  Plastic graduated cylinder.
     4.  Separatory funnels, 1 liter capacity.
     5.  Suction filter apparatus for 25 mm membrane.
     6.  Alpha spectrometric system consisting of multichannel  analyzer,
         biasing electronics, printer, silicon surface barrier  detectors,
         vacuum pump, and chamber.

Reagents
     1.  Ethanol, 95 percent reagent.
     2.  Hydrochloric acid, 12 H.  37 percent reagent.
     3.  Hydrochloric acid, 9 H.  Dilute 750 ml of the 37 percent reagent
         grade HC1 to 1 liter with distilled water.
     4.  Hydrochloric acid, 3 M/Hydrofluor1c acid, 0.1 M mixture.  Dilute
         250 ml of the 37 percent  reagent  grade HC1 and 3.5 ml  of the 48
         percent  reagent grade HF  to  1 liter with distilled water.   Store
         in a plastic bottle.

                                  Pu-02-1

-------
     5.  Hydrochloric acid, 1 M.  Dilute 83 ml  of the 37 percent  reagent
         grade HC1 to 1 liter with distilled water.
     6.  Hydrofluoric acid, 29 M_.  48 percent HF reagent.
     7.  Hydrofluoric acid, 3 M.  Dilute 104 ml  of the 48 percent reagent
         grade HF to 1 liter with distilled water.  Use a  plastic
         graduated cylinder and storage bottle.
     8.  Hydrogen peroxide, 50 percent reagent grade.
                                     +3
     9.  Lanthanum carrier, 0.1 mg La  /ml.  Dissolve  0.0799 g
         La(N03)3» 6H20 per 250 ml 1 M HC1.
     10. Triisooctylamine (TIOA), reagent grade.
     11. TIOA solution in p-xylene, 10 percent.   Dissolve  100 ml  of  the
         triisooctylamine in p-xylene and dilute to  1  liter with  p-xylene.
     12. p-Xylene, reagent grade.
Procedure
     1.  From the specific activity of the plutonium-236  stock  solution,
         determine the size of the aliquot to be used,  that when diluted
                                                               236
         will result in a final  solution of approximately 1 pCi    Pu/ml.
                                  236
     2.  Evaporate the aliquot of    Pu to dryness  in a beaker.
     3.  Add 10 ml of 12 M HC1 and evaporate to dryness.
     4.  Add 100 ml 9 M HC1 to the beaker and warm  to 50°C.
     5.  Add 10 drops of 50 percent hydrogen peroxide to  the solution.
     6.  Equilibrate 100 ml of the 10 percent TIOA  solution with 50 ml of
         warm 9 M HC1 by shaking in a separatory funnel for 1 minute.
     7.  Allow the layers to separate and discard the lower aqueous acid
         phase.
     8.  Add the solution from step 5 to the TIOA in the  separatory funnel
         and shake funnel for 2 minutes.
     9.  Allow phases to separate and discard the lower aqueous acid phase.
     10.  Wash the TIOA solution with 50 ml  9 M HC1  warmed to 50°C.  Shake
         for 1 minute and discard lower aqueous acid phase when separated.
                                 Pu-02-2

-------
    11. Extract the plutonium from the TIOA with 75 ml of 3 M HC1/0.1 M
        HF mixture wanned to 50°C.  Shake funnel for 2 minutes.
    12. Drain and save lower aqueous acid phase.
    13. Repeat steps 11 and 12.  Combine acid strip solution into one
        clean separator/ funnel.
    14. Add 100 ml p-xylene to combined strip solution and shake funnel
        for one minute.
    15. Allow phases to separate cleanly; withdraw lower aqueous acid
        layer into a beaker.  Discard p-xylene.
    16. Evaporate solution from step 15 to dry ness.  Do not overheat.
    17. Add 10 ml 12 M HC1 to residue in beaker and take to dryness.  Do
        not overheat.
    18. Take up solution in 250 ml 1 M HC1 and filter through a filter
        membrane using suction.  Place filtrate in a storage bottle.
    19. Coprecipitate 1 ml aliquots of the stock solution in step 18 by
        adding each aliquot to 15 ml 1 M HC1 in a beaker.
    20. Add 1 ml of lanthanum carrier and 5 ml of 3 ^ HF to each beaker.
        Mix well and set aside for 30 minutes to precipitate LaF3
        carrying plutonium.
    21. Using  suction, filter coprecipitated sample through a filter
        membrane.
    22. Rinse  sample beaker with 10 ml water and add to filter funnel.
        Rinse  beaker with  10 ml ethanol and add to funnel.
    23. Remove clamp and top of funnel with suction on.  Allow membrane
        to dry.
    24. Mount  membrane carefully on 32 mm planchet using double stick
        tape.
    25. Count  sample for 1000 minutes on alpha  spectrometer.
Notes
1.  Nuclepore is a registered trademark of Nuclepore  Corp.,  Pleasanton, CA.
                                 Pu-02-3

-------
References
1.  Volchok, H. L. and dePlanque, G., editors,  EML Procedures Manual,  25th
    Ed., Environmental Measurement Laboratory,  U.S. Department of Energy,
    New York.
                                  Pu-02-4

-------
        RADIOCHEMICAL DETERMINATION  OF RADIUM-226  IN SOLID SAMPLES
                             REQUIRING FUSION

Principle
     Solid samples are solubilized by  fusion with  a special flux.  The
radium-226 in solution is determined by coprecipitation  from the sample
with barium sulfate.   The precipitate  is solubilized and sealed in a
deemanation tube.   After an ingrowth period, the radon-222 is removed into
an alpha scintillation counting  cell for measurement.

Special  Apparatus
     1.   Metricel  DM800 filter membranes or equivalent,  25 mm dia., 0.8
         micrometer pore size.  See  Note 1.
     2.   Magnetic  stirrer and stirring bar.
     3.   Platinum crucibles, 20  ml with lids.
     4.   Suction filter apparatus.
     5.   Tongs for platinum crucibles.

Reagents
     1.   Acetone-ethanol mixture, 50 percent each  reagent by volume.
     2.   Ammonium sulfate, 10 percent.  Dissolve  10 g  reagent grade
         (NH)S0  in distilled  water  and dilute to 100  ml.
            424
     3.  Barium chloride, 10 mg Ba+/ml.   Dissolve 17.79 g  BaCl2»2H20
         in 1 liter distilled water.
     4.  Barium chloride, 2 mg Ba*2/ml.   Dilute 200 ml  of the  10 mg/ml
         barium chloride solution to 1 liter.   Filter after 24 hours.
     5.  Fusion flux.  Mix thoroughly 15 mg barium sulfate  (BaSO^),
         32.9 g potassium carbonate (KgCOg), 25.3 g sodium  carbonate  (Na2C03),
         16.8 g sodium tetraborate decahydrate {Na2B407 • 10H20).
         Heat to expel water, then fuse in a platinum crucible and mix
         thoroughly by swirling.  Cool and grind in a porcelain mortar  to
         pass a 10 to 12 mesh screen.  Store in an airtight bottle.
                                  Ra-01-1

-------
     6.  Hydrochloric acid, 3M.   Dilute  250 ml of  the 37 percent HC1
         reagent to 1 liter with distilled water.
     7.  Hydrogen peroxide, 3 percent reagent.
     8.  Hydrofluoric acid, 29M, 48 percent HF reagent.
     9.  Phosphoric acid,  15f1, 85 percent H3P04  reagent.
     10. Radlum-226 standard solution, 5 to 10 pCI/ml traceable to NBS.
     11. Sulfurlc acid, 18M, 96 percent  H2S04 reagent.
     12. Sulfurlc acid, 0.1 M.  Dilute 6 ml of the 96 percent reagent
         H2S04 to 1 liter with distilled water.
Procedure
     1.  Weigh sample using minimum of 0.5  g  of soil  sample and place In
         platinum crucible.
     2.  Add flux and mix, using 8 g of flux  for each gram of  sample.  Do
         not use less than 4 g of flux (for minimum of 0.5 g soil).
     3.  Put I1d on crucible and place It on  tripod over  burner.  Fuse for
         30 minutes.
     4.  Swirl mixture at least once during fusion.
     5.  Remove crucible from heat with tongs and swirl mixture until it
         begins to solidify.
     6.  Prepare the following solution in  a  beaker,  made up as needed:
         120 ml distilled water, 10 ml 18M  H2S04, and 5 ml 3 percent
         H202.
     7.  Place platinum crucible and lid in beaker.   Fused sample will
         dissolve away from crucible in about 30 minutes.
     8.  Remove crucible from solution.  Rinse crucible with distilled
         water and pour back into beaker.
     9.  Place magnetic stirring bar in beaker and begin  stirring.
     10. Add 50 ml dilute BaCl2 solution to beaker.
     11. Stir contents of beaker for 90 minutes.
     12. Remove magnetic stirring bar and wait overnight  for the BaS04
         to precipitate.
                                  Ra-01-2

-------
13. Pour clear liquid off top of  beaker  so  that entire quantity does
    not have to be filtered.
14. Pour remaining liquid and precipitate into funnel attached to
    suction filter.  Use 0.1  M^ H2S04 as  wash  solution and wash
    filter funnel  twice with  wash solution.
15. Remove clamp and lift filter  funnel  carefully to avoid removing
    filtered precipitate.  Use 1/2 filter membrane to wipe
    precipitate clinging to bottom of filter  funnel and place
    membrane in a platinum crucible.
16. Carefully remove filter membrane from filter frit and place in
    platinum crucible.
17. Add 25 drops 29M HF and 0.3 ml 10 percent (NH4)2S04
    solution to the crucible.
18. Place crucible on hotplate at low temperature and evaporate
    contents to dry ness.
19. Add 2 ml of acetone-alcohol mixture  and burn off solvents with a
    match.
20. Put top on crucible, place on tripod over burner, and heat until
    ashed (about 10-15 minutes).
21. Remove from heat and add 1 ml 15M H^PO^.
22. Place crucible on hot place at low setting for  15 minutes.  Turn
    up to higher temperature for  additional 30 minutes.
23. Hold crucible with platinum-tip tongs in  the hottest part of
    flame of a burner.
24. When white material dissolves and the bubbling  and fumes
    decrease, swirl crucible in upper part  of flame for one minute.
    The result is a clear material which solidifies when removed from
    the heat.
25. Place crucible in hot water bath.
26. Fill crucible with 3MHC1.
27. Leaving lid off, allow liquid in crucible to evaporate slowly  (2
    1/2 - 3 hours) until almost completely  evaporated with white
    crystals remaining.

                             Ra-01-3

-------
     28. Fill  crucible approximately 1/2  full with deionlzed water and
         allow the crystals to dissolve.
     29. Carefully pour solution from crucible  into deemanation storage
         tube described In Deemanation Procedure.  Rinse crucible with
         deionlzed water.
     30. Flame seal tube for storage as described in Deemanation Procedure.
Notes
1.  Metrlcel is a trademark of Gelman Sciences  Inc., Ann Arbor, MI.

References
1.  Standard Methods for the Examination of Water and Waste Water,  15th
    Ed., American Public Health Association, Washington, D.C.  (1980).
                                  Ra-01-4

-------
            RADIOCHEMICAL DETERMINATION OF RADIUM-226  IN URINE

Principle
    Barium-133 is added as a tracer to urine sample.   Alkaline earth
cations are precipitated from the urine with sodium carbonate.  The
precipitate containing barium and radium is further treated with  nitric
acid to remove organic material.   The sample is solubilized and stored in
a deemanation tube for three weeks.  Radium-226 1s  determined by  the
De-emanation Procedure for radium-226.

Special Apparatus
    1.   Centrifuge.
    2.   Gamma ray analyzer with  NaKTl) well crystal.
    3.   Glassware.

Reagents
    1.   Barium-133 tracer.  Approximately 5 nCi/ml.
    2.   Nitric acid 16M, 70 percent HN03 reagent.
    3.   Nitric acid 3M.  Dilute  187 ml of the reagent grade  HN03 to  1
         liter with distilled water.
    4.   Sodium carbonate, 1.5M.   Dissolve 159g Na2C03 in  900 ml
         distilled water and dilute to 1 liter.

Procedure
    1.   Add 1 ml ban'urn-133 tracer to 250 ml urine at room temperature.
    2.   Add 25 ml 1.5M Na2C03 and stir with a magnetic stirrer for 30
         minutes.
    3.   Digest at 50° C for 30 minutes and cool in an ice bath.
    4.   Centrifuge and discard supernate.  Dissolve  precipitate  in 10 ml
         16M HN03.
    5.   Evaporate to dry ness and take up in 25 ml  of 3^1 HN03.
                                  Ra-02-1

-------
     6.   Pipette 1 ml of the sample solution Into a  tube  for gamma ray
         counting.  Compare with 1 ml  barium-133 tracer to obtain chemical
         yield.
     7.   Transfer the whole sample to  a radon emanation tube.  Seal and
         store for three weeks.
     8.   Proceed with de-emanation procedure for rad1um-226.
References
1.  Standard Methods for the Examination of Water and Waste Water,  15th
    Ed., American Public Health Association, Washington,  D.C.  (1980).
                                  Ra-02-2

-------
        RADIOCHEMICAL DETERMINATION OF RADIUM-226 IN WATER  SAMPLES

Principle
     Rad1ura-226 in solution is determined by coprecipitation  from the
sample with barium sulfate.  The sample is then analyzed  using  the
de-emanation procedure.

Special Apparatus
     1.  Metricel DM-800 filter membrane, 25-mm dia.,  0.8-micrometer pore
         size or equivalent.  See Note 1.
     2.  Pleated filter  paper.
     3.  Platinum crucibles. 20 to 30 ml  and lids.
     4.  Crucible tongs  for platinum.
     5.  Glassware.

Special Reagents
     1.  Acetone-ethanol,  50 percent each by volume.
     2.  Ammonium sulfate, 10 percent.  Dissolve 10 g  (NH4)2S04 in
         distilled water and dilute to 100 ml  with  distilled  water.
     3.  Barium chloride stock solution,  10 mg Ba  /ml.   Dissolve 17.79 g
         BaCl9»2H,0 in  1  liter of distilled water.
             e.    c                              +2
     4.  Barium chloride dilute solution, 2 mg Ba  /ml.   Dilute 200 ml
         of the barium chloride stock solution to 1 liter in  a  volumetric
         flask with distilled water.
     5.  Hydrochloric acid, 12M:   37 percent HC1  reagent.
     6.  Hydrochloric acid, 3M_.  Dilute 250 ml  of the  reagent grade HC1 to
         1 liter with distilled water.
     7.  Hydrofluoric acid, 29J1:   48 percent HF reagent.
     8.  Phosphoric acid,  15M:  85 percent H3P04 reagent.
     9.  Radium-226 standard solution, approximately 5 to 10  pCi/ml,
         traceable to the  National Bureau of Standards.
     10. Sulfuric acid,  18M:  96 percent HgS04 reagent.
                                 Ra-03-1

-------
     11.  SuIfuric acid,  0.05M.  Dilute  1.6 ml of the H2S04 reagent to
         1 liter with distilled water.

Procedure
     1.  If water sample Is not clear,  filter a one liter aliquot through
         a pleated filter paper.  Save  any precipitate if the radium
         content of the  precipitate is  needed.  It is then analyzed using
         the procedure for solid samples.
     2.  Place the water sample in a 1.5 liter beaker, add a magnetic
         stirring bar and place on a stlrrer.
     3.  Add the following to the water sample with stirring:  20 ml 12M
         HC1, 50 ml dilute BaClg reagent, and 20 ml 18M H2S04.
     4.  Cover sample and allow to stir for  a minimum of 30 minutes to
         precipitate BaS04.
     5.  Remove magnetic stirring bar and allow mixture to stand overnight.
     6.  Decant clear liquid off the top so  that entire quantity does not
         have to be filtered.
     7.  Decant remaining liquid and precipitate into funnel attached to
         suction filter.  Use 0.05M H2S04 as wash  solution and wash
         filter funnel twice with wash  solution.
     8.  Remove clamp and lift filter funnel carefully to avoid removing
         filtered precipitate.  Use half of  a filter membrane to wipe
         precipitate clinging to bottom of filter  funnel and place
         membrane in a platinum crucible.
     9.  Carefully remove filter membrane from  the filter apparatus and
         place in platinum crucible.
     10. Add 25 drops 29M HF and 0.3 ml 10 percent (NH4)2S04
         solution to volatilize silica as  S1F4.
     11. Place crucible on hotplate at low temperature and take to  dryness.
     12. Add 2 ml of acetone-alcohol mixture and  burn off solvents with a
         match.
                                  Ra-03-2

-------
     13.  Put  top on crucible, place on tripod over burner, and heat until
         ashed  (about  10-15 minutes).
     14.  Remove from heat and add 1 ml 15f1 H3P04.
     15.  Place  crucible on hot plate at low setting for 15 minutes.  Turn
         up to  higher  temperature for additional 30 minutes.
     16.  Hold crucible with platinum-tip tongs in the hottest part of
         flame  of  a burner.
     17.  When white material dissolves and the bubbling and fumes
         decrease, swirl crucible in upper part of flame for one minute.
         The  result is a clear material which solidifies when removed from
         the  heat.
     18.  Place  crucible in hot water bath.
     19.  Fill the  crucible almost full with 3M HC1.
     20.  Leaving lid off, allow  liquid in crucible to evaporate slowly (1
         1/2  -  3 hours) until almost completely evaporated with white
         crystals  remaining.
     21.  Fill crucible approximately half full with deionized water and
         allow  the crystals to dissolve.
     22.  Carefully pour solution from crucible into de-emanation storage
         tube described in De-emanation Procedure.  Rinse crucible with
         distilled water.
     23.  Flame  seal tube for storage as described in the Rad1um-226
         De-emanation  Procedure  and proceed.
Notes
1.  Metricel  is a trademark of Gelman Sciences,  Inc., Ann Arbor, MI.

References
1.  Standard  Methods for the Examination of Water and Waste Water, 15th
    Ed., American Public Health Association, Washington, D.C.  (1980).
                                 Ra-03-3

-------
                RADIOCHEMICAL DETERMINATION OF RADIUM-226

                          De-emanation Procedure

Principle
     After sample preparation is completed,  individual  samples are sealed
in disposable storage tubes.   Radon-222 ingrowth  proceeds  through three
weeks storage of the tubes.   The tubes are  then connected  to a gas
manifold and the accumulated  radon-222 is swept into  evacuated Lucas alpha
scintillation counting cells.  The alpha activity in  the cells is measured
after five hours ingrowth of  radon-222 progeny.

Special Apparatus
     1.  De-emanation manifold assembly.
     2.  Lucas alpha scintillation cells.
     3.  Photomultiplier tube assembly and associated electronics.
     4.  Tank of nitrogen.
     5.  Glass-sealing torch.
     6.  Vacuum pump assembly.
     7.  Pyrex brand glass tubing, 15-mm inside diameter,  60-cm  lengths.
     8.  Acid dichromate cleaning solution.
     9.  Vinyl tubing, 1.3 cm inside diameter, 1.6 cm outside  diameter.

Procedure
     1.  Clean 60-cm lengths of glass tubing in dichromate cleaning
         solution and dry.
     2.  Flame seal one end of the individual sections of the  glass  tubing.
     3.  Starting approximately  10 cm from the open end of a section of
         the tubing, soften the tubing in a flame and form a constriction
         approximately 6.5 cm long and 0.6 cm diameter.
     4.  Transfer prepared sample to de-emanation tube using distilled
         water as wash.   Fill to within  1.3 cm of constriction.
                                  Ra-04-1

-------
5.  Flame seal tube at constriction without overheating.
6.  Store sample-containing sealed tubes  for at least 21 days.
7.  Soak one end of each of two 9 cm  long by 1.25 cm in diameter
    pieces of vinyl tubing in acetone until slight swelling occurs.
8.  Place a serum stopper in the solvent  treated end of each piece of
    tubing so that the tubing surrounds the sleeve of the stopper.
9.  Insert 26-gauge hypodermic needles in the rubber serum stoppers.
10. Soak the other ends of the vinyl  tubing in acetone until swelling
    is evident.
11. Slip the sol vent-treated tubing over  the sealed end of the  sample
    tube.  Leave the needle inserted  in the stopper to relieve
    pressure as tubing dries.
12. Remove needles from stoppers after 24 hours.
13. Evacuate Lucas scintillation cells by inserting needle connected
    to vacuum line through stopper attached to  neck of cell.
14. Disconnect cell from vacuum line  with vacuum pump operating.
15. Set up radon transfer manifold as shown in  the cell evacuation
    illustration (Figure 1).
16. Insert needle from vacuum line into  lower stopper of  the vacuum
    tube.  Insert needle attached to  vacuum gauge  into the  same
    stopper.
17. Remove vacuum line needle and check  gauge for  possible  leak.
18. Reapply vacuum to tube and close  upper valve.
19. Insert needle from vacuum line into  upper stopper of  the sample
    tube being careful not to break tip  of tube with needle.
20. Repeat step 19 for other end of sample tube.
21. Allow 10 minutes to elapse in order  to check  for air  leaks  at
    both ends of sample tube.  A leak is indicated by partial
    refilling of the collapsed vinyl  tubing.
22. Attach sample cell to manifold as shown in  purging  illustration
    (Figure 2).
23. Break both top and bottom tips of sample  tube  using long  nose
    pliers.

                             Ra-04-2

-------
    24. Record time.
    25. Put rubber sealant on the vinyl tubing in the area of the broken
        glass tips as a precaution against puncture of the tubing.
    26. Cautiously open top valve to permit pressure equalization between
        sample tube and Lucas cell, being careful not to draw up sample
        liquid into drying tube.
    27. Close upper valve.
    28. Start nitrogen purge with flow rate barely detectable through
        hole in tubing.
    29. Flush valve, and, with valve closed, insert needle from flow tube
        into lower stopper of sample tube.
    30. Cautiously open lower valve to control flow of nitrogen into
        sample tube.  The bubble rate should be between 15 and 45 per
        minute.
    31. For a period of 30 minutes open upper valve briefly in order to
        equalize pressure between Lucas cell and sample tube.
    32. After 30 minutes, open upper valve completely and open lower
        valve to increase bubble rate.
    33. When nitrogen flow has stopped and vinyl tubing has expanded to
        shape, simultaneously remove needles from stoppers of Lucas cell
        and lower stopper of sample tube.
    34. The Lucas cell is stored for 5 hours prior to counting for
        ingrowth of radon-222 progeny.
    35. Count the sample for 1000 minutes.
    36. Dispose of needles and drying tube.
    37. Clean upper valve by the following steps:  (a) disassemble valve,
        (b) submerge in acetone and rinse with water, (c) submerge in
        mineral spirits,  (d) wash in hot soapy water and rinse, and
        (e) dry in oven at 75° C.
Calculations
     Calculate the concentration^, of radium-226 in picocuries per liter
                                 Ra-04-3

-------
as follows:
                C1-CB
              (2.22MEMV)    1-e  "All       e 'At2       1-e ~^2
where

     x     =  decay constant for  radon-222  (t 1/2 = 3.825 days),
     t,    =  time interval  allowed  for  ingrowth or radon from radium,
     t2    =  time interval  between  de-emanation and counting,
     tj    =  counting time,
     C.    =  observed count rate of sample,
     CB    =  background count rate,
     E     =  calibration constant of the scintillation cell in counts per
              unit time per picocurie of radon plus decay products (All of
              the corrections can be obtained directly or indirectly from
              Table 1),
     V     =  sample volume (liters), and
     2.22  =  dpm/pCi.

Sample Calculation

     Assume the following data:

     t,    =  13d., 14 h., 6 m,
     t-    =  4 h., 15 m,
     t3    =  16 h., 30 m,
     C.    =  199.2 counts/hour,
     CB    =  9.3 counts/hour, and
     E     =151.1 counts/hour/dpm.  See Note 1.
                                  Ra-04-4

-------
From Table 1,
     1-e "Xtl= 1. - 0.09484 x  0.89969 x  0.99925 = 0.91474,

     e ~xt2 = 0.97025 x 0.99811  =  096842,  and

     Xt3/ (l-e"xt3) = 1.06358  (by  linear interpolation).

From these data,

 pCi Ra = (199.2 - 9.3)  x    1       x      1      x   1.06358 = 0.680.
          (151.1) (2.22)   0.91474       0.96842

    Calculate the lower limit of detection (LLD)  in picocuries per liter
as follows:
                       LLD
                             (2.22)(E)(V)(T)

where

     CB    =  background count rate,
     T     =  counting time, and
     E     =  calibration constant of the scintillation cell  in counts per
              unit time per picocurie of radon plus  decay  products  in
              counts per hour per dpm.

     This LLD is valid if the background counting time is  approximately
equal to the sample counting time.
Notes
1.  The calibration constant is determined by sealing  a known quantity of
    radium-226 in a de-emanation tube.  After 21 days  storage,  the  radon
                                  Ra-04-5

-------
    Is transferred to a Lucas cell  and counted.  The Lucas cells are
    Individually calibrated.  The radium-226 used Is traceable to the
    National  Bureau of Standards.  Approximately 5-10 of radium-226,
    accurately known, 1s used for each calibration.
References
    Blanchard, R.L., An Emanation System for  Determining Small Quantities
    of Radium-226, U.S. Department of Health,  Education, and Welfare,
    Public Health Service Publication No. 999-RH-9  (1964).
    Ferri, E., Magno, R.J., and Setter,  L.R.,  Radionuclide Analysis of
    Large Numbers of Food and Water Samples,  U.S. Department of Health,
    Education, and Welfare, Public Health Service Publication  Number
    999-RH-17 (1965).
    Standard Methods for the Examination of Water and Waste Water, 15th
    Ed., American Public Health Association,  Washington, D.C.  (1980).
    Rushing, D.E., The Analysis of Effluents  and Environmental Samples
    from Uranium Hills and of Biological Samples for Uranium.  Radium and
    Polonium.  SM/41-44.  Symposium of Radiological  Health and Safety,
    Vienna, Austria (August 1963).
                                  Ra-04-6

-------
                    TABLE 1


A.  Decay of Radon (in minutes,  hours,  and  days)
B.  Growth of Radon from Radium (in days).
C.  Multiplicative Factor for Correction of Radon
    Activity for Decay during Counting  (in  hours)

     (Based on 3.825 days as half-life  of radon)
Time

0
1
2
3
4
5
G
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

Minutes
1.000,00
0.999,87
0.999,75
0.999,62
0.999,59
0.999,37
0.999,25
0.999,12
0.998,99
0.998,87
0.998,74
0.998,62
0.998,49
0.998,37
0.998,24
0.998,11.
0.997,99
0.997,86
0.997,74
0.997,61
0.997,49
0.997,36
0.997,24
0.997,11
0.996,99
0.996,86
A. e'xt
Hours
1.000,00
0.992,48
0.985,01
0.977,60
0.970,25
0.962,95
0.955,71
0.948,52
0.941,39
0.934,31
0.927,27
0.920,31
0.913,38
0.906,51
0.899,69
0.892,93
0.886,21
0.879,55
0.872,93
0.866,36
0.859,85
0.853,38
0.846,96
0.840,59
0.834,27
0.827,99

Days
1.000,00
0.834,27
0.696,00
0.580,65
0.484,42
0.404,14
0.337,16
0.281,28
0.234,66
0.195,77
0.163,33
0.136,26
0.113,68
0.094,84
0.079,12
0.066,01
0.055,07
0.045,94
0.038,33
0.031,98
0.026,68
0.022,25
0.018,57
0.015,49
0.012,92
0.010,78
B. l-e'xt
Days
0.000,00
0.165,73
0.304,00
0.419,35
0.515,58
0.595,86
0.662,84
0.718,72
0.765,34
0.804,23
0.836,67
0.863,74
0.886,32
0.905,16
0.920,88
0.933,99
0.944,93
0.954,06
0.961,67
0.968,02
0.973,32
0.977,75
0.981,43
0.984,51
0.987,08
0.989,22
xt
C. l-ext
Hours
1.000,00
1.003,72
1.007,54
1.011,39
1.015,16
1.018,98
1.022,83
1.026,65
1.030,51
1.034,36
1.038,23
1.042,10
1.045,97
1.049,88
1.053,79
1.057,69
1.061,61
1.065,54
1.069,49
1.073,44
1.077,40
1.081,37
1.085,35
1.089,34
1.093,33
1.097,34
                       Ra-04-7

-------
                              TABLE 1 (Continued)
                                                                 	xt
Time                A.  e~xt                   B.  1-e-**      C.  ]

26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
Minutes
0.996,73
0.996,61
0.996,48
0.996,36
0.996,23
0.996,11
0.995,98
0.995,86
0.995,73
0.995,61
0.995,48
0.995,36
0.995,23
0.995,11
0.994,98
0.994,85
0.994,73
0.994,60
0.994,48
0.994,35
0.994,23
0.994,10
0.993,98
0.993,85
0.993,73
0.993,60
0.993,48
0.993,35
0.993,23
0.993,10
0.992,98
0.992,85
0.992,73
0.992,60
0.992,48
Hours
0.821,77
0.815,58
0.809,45
0.803,36
0.797,32
0.791,32
0.785,37
0.779,46
0.773,60
0.767,78
0.762,01
0.756,28
0.750,59
0.744,94
0.739,34
0.733,78
0.728,26
0.722,78
0.717,34
0.711,95
0.706,59
0.701,23
0.696,00
0.690,77
0.685,57
0.680,42
0.675,30
0.670,22
0.665,18
0.660,18
0.655,21
0.650,28
0.645,39
0.640,54
0.635,72
Days
0.008,99
0.007,50
0.006,26
0.005,22
0.004,36
0.003,63
0.003,03
0.002,53
0.002,11
0.001,76
0.001,47
0.001,23
0.001,02
0.000,85
0.000,71
0.000,59
0.000,50
0.000,41
0.000,34
0.000,29
0.000,24
0.000,20
0.000,17
0.000,14
0.000,12
0.000,10
0.000,08
0.000,07
O.OOO.OG
0.000,05
0.000,04
0.000,03
0.000,03
0.000,02
0.000,02
Days
0.991,01
0.992,50
0.993,74
0.994,78
0.995,64
0.996,37
0.996,97
0.997,47
0.997,89
0.998,24
0.998,53
0.998,77
0.998,98
0.999,15
0.999,29
0.999,41
0.999,50
0.999,59
0.999,66
0.999,71
0.999,76
0.999,80
0.999,83
0.999,86
0.999,88
0.999,90
0.999,92
0.999,93
0.999,94
0.999,95
0.999,96
0.999,97
0.999,97
0.999,98
0.999,98
Hours
1.101,36
1.105,39
1.109,45
1.113,47
1.117,52
1.121,58
1.125,66
1.129,74
1.133,83
1.137,94
1.142,05
1.146,17
1.150,30
1.154,44
1.158,59
1.162,75
1.166,92
1.171,09
1.175,28
1.179,47
1.183,68
1.187,89
1.192,12
1.196,35
1.200,60
1.204,85
1.209,11
1.213,38
1.217,66
1.221,95
1.226,25
1.230,56
1.234,88
1.239,21
1.243.54
                                     Ra-04-8

-------
18 ga. needles
   (glued)
                              Lucas
                               Scintillation
                               Cell
                            Magnesium
                            Perchlorate
 18 ga. needles
 H/468L
  adapter
          ML/ML sliplock
              adapter
      To Vacuum
I
        Figure 1.  Cell evacuation assembly.

                  Ra-04-9

-------
  18 ga. needles
     (glued)
  18 ga. needles
   Tygon tubing
   ML/ML
   sliplock
    adapter
   H/468L
    adapter
From Nitrogen
                                 Lucas
                                  Scintillation
                                   Cell
                                Magnesium
                                Perch I orate
  ML/ML sliplock
     adapter
Sample
                               26 ga. needle
            Figure 2.  Cell purging assembly.

                    Ra-04-10

-------
20mm
^MMMI














^M^M
 90mm
                  Phosphor
                   Coated
                 Clear Silica
                   Window
Serum Stopper

Brass Collar
                                       Kovar Metal
              iXVVVVVVWVXVXV
                     50mm
          Figure 3.  Lucas type scintillation cell.

                     Ra-04-11

-------
        RADIOCHEMICAL DETERMINATION OF RADIUM-228  IN  WATER  SAMPLES

Principle
     The radium solution from the radium-226 determination  is saved and
the radium is reprecipitated as a radium-barium sulfate.  This  precipitate
is dissolved in a pentasodium diethylenetriamine pentaacetate solution.
The radium-228 is a weak beta emitter and decays to actinium-228, which is
allowed to ingrow for three days.   The actinium-228 is  then extracted with
Di-2-ethylhexylphosphoric acid and back-extracted  with  nitric acid.  The
actinium-228 is beta counted in a low background proportional counter.

Special Apparatus
     1.  Centrifuge.
     2.  Planchets, stainless steel,  5 cm diameter.
     3.  Separatory funnels, 125 ml,  2 liter capacity*
     4.  Magnetic stirrer and stirring bars.
     5.  Glassware.
     6.  Suction filter apparatus.

Reagents
     1.  Acetic acid, glacial 17.4M_.   HC2H302 reagent.
     2.  Acetic acid 6M.  Dilute 345  ml  of the  reagent  grade HC2H302
         to one liter with distilled  water.
     3.  Actinium wash solution.   Dissolve 100  g monochloroacetic acid and
         2.4 ml of 41 percent NagDTPA in 800 ml  of distilled water and
         dilute to 1 liter.  Adjust the pH to 3.0  with  NaOH pellets
         (approximately 25.4 g NaOH).
     4.  Ammonium hydroxide 15M.  Reagent grade NH.OH.
                              ~~  +2
     5.  Barium carrier, 10 mg Ba  /ml.   Dissolve  17.78 g BaCl2«»2H20 in
         800 ml distilled water and dilute to 1 liter.  Allow to stand 24
         hours and filter.
                                +2
     6.  Barium carrier, 5 mg Ba  /ml.  Dissolve 4.45 g BaCl2»2H20
                                 Ra-05-1

-------
    in 400 ml distilled water and dilute  to 500 ml.
7.  Bismuth carrier,  20 mg Bi*3/ml.   Dissolve 46.4 g Bi(N03)3« 5H20
    in 800 ml distilled water and dilute  to 1 liter.
8.  Chloroacetic acid, 2NL  Add 189  g of  reagent grade chloroacetic
    acid to a beaker, dissolve in distilled water and dilute to 1
    liter.
9.  Diammmonium citrate, 2Mk  Dissolve 226.2 g dibasic ammonium
    citrate, (MH4)2HCgH507, in distilled  water and dilute
    to 500 ml.
10. Di-2-ethyIhexylphosphoric acid,  HDEHP,  15 percent in n-heptane.
    Dilute 150 ml HDEHP to 1 liter with n-heptane and transfer to a
    2-liter separator^ funnel.  Wash the  HDEHP twice with 200  ml
    aliquots of a 1:1 mixture of 2M  diammonium citrate and  15^4
    NH4OH.  The mixture is prepared  by adding 100 ml 15M NH4OH to
    100 ml 2J1 di ammonium citrate in  a beaker and mixing.  Add  to the
    separatory funnel containing the HDEHP. Shake for one  minute,
    releasing pressure frequently.  Allow the layers to separate and
    discard lower layer.  Wash the HDEHP  twice with 4M HN03,
    discarding the lower layer each  time  after shaking for  one
    minute.  Store the cleaned HDEHP in a polyethylene bottle.
    Immediately before using the HDEHP solution, the amount to be
    used is washed first with an equal volume of distilled  water and
    then with one-half the volume of actinium wash.  The lower layers
    are discarded each time after shaking for one minute.
11. Diethylenetriamine pentaacetic acid,  pentasodium salt,  Na5
    DTPA, 41 percent reagent solution.
12. Diethylenetriamine pentaacetic acid,  pentasodium salt,  Na5DTPA,
    0.1714, pH 10.  Add 209 ml of the 41 percent Na5 DTPA solution
    to 400 ml of distilled water and filter through glass wool with
    suction.  Dilute to 1 liter with distilled water and adjust to pH
    10 using either perchloric acid  or sodium hydroxide  (usually
    requires 10 to 12 ml perchloric  acid).  Store in a polyethylene
    bottle.

                             Ra-05-2

-------
     13.  n-Heptane.   Reagent grade.
     14.  Hydrochloric acid,  12M,  37  percent  HC1  reagent.
     15.  Hydrochloric acid,  Itt.   Dilute  83 ml of the 37 percent reagent
         grade HC1  to 1 liter with distilled water.
                                +2
     16.  Lead carrier,  100 mg Pb   /ml.   Dissolve 160 g reagent grade
         Pb(N03)2 in 800 ml  distilled water  and  dilute to 1 liter.
     17.  Nitric acid, 16M, 70 percent HN03 reagent.
     18.  Nitric acid, 4M.  Dilute 250 ml  of  the  70 percent reagent grade
         HU03 to 1  liter with distilled  water.
     19.  Nitric acid, 1M.  Dilute 63 ml  of the 70 percent reagent
         grade HN03 to 1 liter with  distilled water.
     20.  Perchloric acid, 12M, 70 percent HC104  reagent.
     21.  Sodium hydroxide.  Reagent  grade pellets.
     22.  Sodium sulfate, 20  percent. Dissolve 20 g anhydrous Na2S04
         in 80 ml distilled water and dilute to  100 ml.
     23.  SuIfuric acid, 18M, 96  percent  H2S04 reagent.
     24.  Sulfuric add, 4M.   Dilute  222  ml of the 96 percent reagent grade
         H2S04 to 1 liter with distilled water.
Procedure
         Transfer 1,000 ml  of the water to a  1,500 ml beaker.  Adjust the
         pH to approximately 1.0 with 16M HN03  and add 200 mg of lead
         carrier.
         Add 100 ml  18M H2S04 and heat to 70°C  with stirring for one
         hour.  Allow the lead sulfate to settle overnight.
         Carefully decant as much clear liquid  as possible without losing
         any precipitate.  Pour equal volumes of the remaining liquid Into
         two centrifuge tubes of equal volume (40-ml or  100-ml).
         Centrifuge and decant supernate.  If necessary, repeat until all
         precipitate has been collected 1n the  two centrifuge tubes.
         Slurry the precipitate in one tube with 4M H2SO. and transfer
         quantitatively to the other tube using 4M H2S04 as wash.
                                 Ra-05-3

-------
    Centrifuge and discard the supernate.
4.  Place a stirring bar In the tube containing  the  PbSO^, add 1 ml
    of glacial acetic acid, 6 ml of 41  percent DTPA, and 1 ml
    distilled water.  Heat with stirring until dissolution 1s
    complete.
5.  Add with stirring, 20 mg bismuth carrier and 2 ml  18M HgSO^.
    Digest 5 to 10 minutes In a hot water  bath,  cool,  centrifuge, and
    discard supernate.  See Note 1.
6.  Add 15 ml of 0.17M^ DTPA to the precipitate,  place  1n a boiling
    water bath and heat with stirring to dissolve the  precipitate
    (dissolution may require 20 minutes).
7.  When the precipitate has dissolved In  step 6, add  1 ml of barium
    carrier (10 mg/ml), 1 ml Na2S04 (20 percent), dilute to  28 ml
    with distilled water, and then add 2 ml  of 6M acetic acid.   Heat
    In a hot water bath for five minutes while stirring with a
    magnetic stirring bar.
8.  Transfer to an 1ce bath.  Allow to cool  for  five minutes with
    stirring.  Remove stirring bar and centrifuge.   Decant and
    discard supernate.
9.  Repeat steps 6, 7, and 8 omitting the  addition  of  Ba*  In step
    7.  Record the time the acetic acid 1s added.  See Note  2.
10. To the BaS04 precipitate, add 15 ml 0.17M DTPA,  heat and stir
    until all dissolves.
11. Allow solution to cool, stopper centrifuge tube and store for at
    least 36 hours to allow for Ac-228 Ingrowth.
12. After the Ingrowth period, place sample In a boiling water  bath,
    Insert a magnetic stirring bar and stir until any  precipitate
    that may have formed during the Ingrowth period has dissolved.
    Then add 1 ml 20 percent Na2S04, dilute to 28 ml with
    distilled water and add 2 ml of 6M acetic add.   Record  time.
    See Note 3.
                             Ra-05-4

-------
13. Allow mixture to heat in the boiling  water bath  for five minutes
    with stirring, then remove stirring bar and place centrifuge tube
    in an ice bath for five minutes.   Centrifuge and decant supernate
    into a clean 40-ml centrifuge tube.   Rinse walls with  2 to 3 ml
    of water, exercising care not to  disturb precipitate.  Add wash
    to the tube containing the supernate.
14. Add 1 ml of barium carrier (5mg/ml) to the centrifuge  tube
    containing the supernate.  Heat with  stirring in a boiling water
    bath for five minutes.  Cool in a ice water bath for five minutes
    and centrifuge.  See Note 4.
15. Quantitatively transfer supernate to  a 100-ml beaker containing 5
    ml of 2M monochloracetic acid. Measure the pH to confirm that it
    is 3.0.  See Note 5.
16. Transfer the solution to a 125-ml separatory funnel.   Add 100 ml
    of cleaned and actinium washed 15 percent HDEHP using  a portion
    to wash the 100-ml beaker.  See Note  6.
17. Shake vigorously for two minutes  (relieve pressure as  needed).
    Allow layers to separate and discard  lower (aqueous) phase.
18. Add 10 ml of the actinium wash solution.  Shake for one minute,
    allow layers to separate and discard  lower (aqueous) layer.
19. Repeat step 18.
20. Add 10 ml of 1M_ HNOj.  Shake for  one  minute, allow layers to
    separate, and collect lower layer in  an 80-ml beaker.
21. Repeat step 20 using 5 ml of 1M HNO-j.  Combine lower aqueous
    layer in 80-ml beaker containing  aqueous fraction  from step 20.
    Discard organic phase.
22. Evaporate solution to dryness on  a 5  cm planchet.  Continue
    heating planchet until all nitric acid vapors have been removed.
23. Count sample and compute Ra-228 concentration.  See Note  7.
                             Ra-05-5

-------
Calculations
     Calculate the concentration.  Z,  of radium-228  in picocuries per liter
as follows:
                                 C1-CB
                (2.22)(Y)(E)(V) (l-e'u-11JLl)  (e'°'113t2)
where
     C^    =  sample count rate,
     Cg    =  background count rate,
     Y     =  chemical yield based on counting  rate of spike added and
              recovered (see Note 7),
     E     =  beta counting efficiency,
     V     =  sample size (liters),
     tj    =  actinium-228 period of  ingrowth from radium-228  (hours) (see
              steps 9 and 12),
     tg    =  actinium-228 decay period  (hours) measured from  the actinium
              separation (step 12) to the mid-time of the beta count, and
     2.22  =  dpm/pCf.

     Calculate the lower limit of detection  (LLD) in picocuries per liter
as follows:
                      LLD =
                            (2.22){Y)(E)(V)(T)
where

     Y     =  chemical yield,
     E     =  beta, counting efficiency,
     V     =  sample volume (liters),  and
     T     =  counting time.


                                 Ra-05-6

-------
    This LLD calculation Is valid  if  the  sample counting time Is equal to
the background counting  time.
Notes
1.  If Ra-226 is determined by de-emanation  of  Rn-222 between steps 4 and
    5, the supernate will  contain the  B1-210 that  grew  in during the
    30-day Rn-222 ingrowth period and  can be used  to determine Pb-210 (For
    a 30-day ingrowth period,  B1-210 will  be 98.4  percent of its
    equilibrium value).
2.  Steps 6, 7, and 8 are  performed to remove all  Ac-228 present.  The
    second BaSO^ precipitation with acetic acid provides an actinium
    free precipitate and begins the measured ingrowth of the Ac-228 from
    the Ra-228 present.
3.  The precipitation of BaS04 in step 10 isolates the  actinium in the
    supernate and ends the Ac-228 ingrowth period.
4.  The second BaS04 precipitation insures complete removal of the
    radium.
5.  It is important that the pH of the solution containing the actinium is
    3.0.  If necessary,  adjust pH with additional  2^ monochloracetic acid.
6.  It is Important that the HDEHP be  washed with  an equal volume of
    distilled water and half volume aliquot  of  actinium wash solution
    immediately prior to using.
7.  There is no isotope of actinium available to monitor the chemical
    yield of Ac-228.  To determine the chemical  yield,  a second 1-liter
    sample of acidified water is spiked with a  known quantity of Ra-228
    and analyzed in the exact manner and at  the same time as the unknown
    sample.  The chemical  yield determined for  the spiked sample Is
    assumed equal to that  for the unknown sample.   The  spiked sample
    should be analyzed with each batch of unknown  samples.
                                 Ra-05-7

-------
References
1.  Johnson, J.O., Determination of Radlum-228 in Natural Waters.
    Radiochemical Analysis of Water, Geological  Survey Water-Supply  Paper
    1696-G., U.S. Government Printing Office,  Washington, D.C.,  (1971).
2.  Percival, D.R. and Martin, D.B., "Sequential  Determination of
    Radium-226, Radlum-228, Actinium-227,  and  Thorium Isotopes in
    Environmental and Process Waste Samples,"  Analytical Chemistry,  4£
    1742-1749, (1974).
3.  Krieger, H.L., and Whittaker,  E.L.,  Prescribed Procedures for
    Measurement of Radioactivity in Drinking Water,  EPA-600/4-80-032,
    Environmental Monitoring and Support Laboratory, Office of Research
    and Development, U.S. Environmental  Protection Agency, Cincinnati,
    Ohio (August 1980).
                                 Ra-05-8

-------
       RADIOCHEMICAL  DETERMINATION OF RADIOSTRONTIUM IN FOOD ASH AND
                            OTHER SOLID SAMPLES

Principle
     Barium, calcium and strontium carriers are  added  to  the  ashed
sample.  Magnesium is precipitated and  removed from the sample at pH  3.8.
Barium and strontium are adsorbed on a  cation exchange resin  allowing
calcium to pass through.  The barium and  strontium are selectively  eluted
and the strontium is precipitated.   Strontium-89 and strontium-90 are
radioassayed separately by measuring the  Ingrowth of yttrlum-90.

Special Apparatus
     1.  Graduated separatory funnel as reservoir for  column,  1 liter
         capacity.
     2.  Ion exchange column, 2.5 cm Internal diameter, 18 cm in length.
     3.  Metricel DM800 membrane filters  or equivalent, 25 mm diameter,
         0.8 micrometer pore size.   See Note 1.
     4.  Nickel crucible, 250 ml volume and lid.
     5.  Stainless steel planchets,  5 cm diameter.
     6.  Suction filter apparatus.
     7.  Centrifuge, floor model.
     8.  Glassware.
     9.  Blast burner.
     10. pH meter.
     11. Magnetic stirrer.

Reagents
     1.  Ammonium hydroxide, 15M.   Reagent grade NH^OH.
     2.  Ammonium hydroxide, 6M.  Dilute  405 ml  NH4OH  reagent to 1  liter
         with distilled water.
     3.  Barium carrier, 5.0 mg Ba*2/ml.   Dissolve 9.5 g  Ba(N03)2 in
         900 ml of distilled water.   Add  1 ml of 16M HN03 and dilute  to
                                 Sr-01-1

-------
    1 liter with distilled water.
4.  Calcium nitrate, 2M.  Dissolve 472  g  Ca(N03)2 • 4H20 In 750
    ml distilled water.  Dilute to 1  liter with distilled water.
5.  Cation exchange resin, Dowex 50WX8, 50-100 mesh, Ma  form, or
    equivalent.  Wash 40 ml resin (H+)  with  600 ml 4M NaCl.  Wash
    all excess NaCl from resin with water and check for chloride with
    0.1M AgN03 before using resin.
6.  Ethanol, 95 percent reagent.
7.  Ethylenedlamlne tetraacetlc add  dlsodium salt, Na2EDTA 6
    percent.  Dissolve 66.6 g Na2EDTA In  900 ml distilled water and
    dilute to 1 liter with distilled  water.
8.  Ethylenedlamlne tetraacetlc add  d1 sodium salt, Na2EDTA 2
    percent.  Dissolve 22.2 g Na2EDTA in  900 ml distilled water and
    dilute to 1 liter with distilled  water.
9.  Hydrochloric acid, 12M.  Reagent  grade  HC1.
10. Hydrochloric acid, 6M.  Dilute 500 ml of the  reagent grade HC1 to
    1 liter with distilled water.
11. Hydrochloric acid, 1.5M.  Dilute  125  ml  of  the reagent grade  HC1
    to 1 liter with distilled water.
12. Nitric acid, 191.  Reagent grade  HN03>
13. Nitric acid, 6M.   Dilute 375 ml of the  reagent grade HN03 to  1
    liter with distilled water.
14. Silver nitrate, 0.1M.  Dissolve 1.7 g AgN03 reagent in
    distilled water.   Dilute to 100 ml  with distilled water.  Store
    in brown bottle.
15. Sodium acetate, buffered pH 4.6.   Dissolve  200 g of anhydrous
    sodium acetate  in  500 ml distilled water.   Adjust pH to 4.6 with
    acetic acid and dilute to 1 liter with  distilled water.
16. Sodium carbonate.  Anhydrous reagent powder.
17. Sodium carbonate,  1.5M.  Dissolve  159 g of  Na2C03  in 900 ml
    of distilled water and dilute to 1 liter with distilled water.
18. Sodium chloride, 411.  Dissolve 234 g of NaCl  in 900 ml of
                             Sr-01-2

-------
         distilled water and dilute  to  1  liter with distilled water.
     19.  Sodium hydroxide.   Reagent  grade pellets.
     20.  Strontium carrier,  20. mg Sr+2/ml.   Dissolve 48.3 g of
         Sr(N03)2 in 900 ml  of distilled  water.   Add 1 ml 16M HN03
         reagent and dilute  to 1  liter  with  distilled water.
Procedure
     1.  Dry the homogenized sample at 110°C  to constant weight.
     2.  Ash the dried sample at 550°C for no less  than 72  hours.
     3.  Place 10 g of ash in a 250 ml nickel crucible.  Add  2 ml  of
         strontium carrier and 1 ml barium carrier  to  the ash.  Add 1 ml
         of 2M calcium nitrate solution.   See Note  2.
     4.  Add 50 g of sodium hydroxide pellets, mix  and fuse over  a blast
         burner for 15 minutes or until the sample  is  a clear red melt.
         Begin heating slowly.  Gradually increase  heating  when reaction
         subsides.  Remove crucible from flame and  slowly add 5 g
         anhydrous sodium carbonate, swirl to mix,  and heat the clear melt
         for 20 minutes.
     5.  Transfer the crucible from the heat to a cold water  bath in order
         to crack the fusion mixture.  Transfer the mixture to a  one-liter
         beaker and wash the residue into the beaker with distilled water.
     6.  Add 200 ml hot, distilled water to the beaker and  gently boil  to
         disintegrate the fused mixture.  See Note  3.
     7.  Transfer the sample to a 250 ml centrifuge bottle  and centrifuge
         for five minutes.  Discard supernate.
     8.  Wash the residue twice with 200 ml aliquots of  hot distilled
         water, discarding the supernate each time.
     9.  Dissolve the residue in 20 ml 6M HC1 by gently  boiling  until  the
         solution is transparent.  Add 100 ml water.
     10. If insoluble silica is present, centrifuge, pour off supernate
         and save in separate beaker.
     11. Wash the residue twice with  100 ml aliquots of distilled water.
                                  Sr-01-3

-------
    Centrifuge and add wash water to beaker containing first wash
    solution from step 10.   Discard residue.
12. Add combined sample to  500 ml of 6 percent disodium EOTA solution
    In a 2-liter beaker. Adjust pH to 3.8 with pH meter using
    approximately 10 ml 15M NH^OH.  See Note 4.
13. Stir vigorously for 75  minutes using a magnetic stlrrer to
    precipitate the magnesium salt of EDTA.
14. Filter off any Mg EDTA  and adjust filtrate to pH 4.6 (pH meter)
    with approximately 2 ml of 15M NH4OH.  Add 20 ml of sodium
    acetate buffer solution, pH 4.6 and readjust solution to pH 4.6
    (pH meter) with approximately 4 ml of 15M NH4OH.  Dilute to 1
    liter.
15. Transfer solution to column reservoir and let flow through the
    cation resin column at a flow rate of 20 ml per minute.  Stop
    flow when just enough solution remains to cover top of resin In
    column.
16. Adjust pH of 600 ml, 2 percent Na2EDTA to 5.1 with 6M NH4OH.
    Add to column reservoir and let  flow  through column at 20
    ml/minute.  Record time at end of elutlon as beginning of
    yttr1um-90 Ingrowth.
17. Wash column with 200 ml water at a flow  rate of 20 ml/minute.
    Discard all effluents.
18. Place 460 ml 1.5M HC1 In reservoir and elute at a flow rate of 8
    ml/minute.  Discard first 60 ml  of effluent.  Collect the  next
    400 ml, which contains the strontium  fraction.
19. Add 200 ml 15M NH4OH to the effluent  containing the strontium
    fraction and stir with a magnetic  stlrrer.   Slowly  add 10  ml
    1.5M  Na2C03 solution and stir vigorously  for an  additional
    30 minutes.
20. Collect the strontium carbonate  precipitate on a  tared membrane
    filter.  Wash with  three 10 ml  aliquots  each of water and
    ethanol.  Transfer  to a planchet and  allow sample to dry one hour
    in a desiccator.

                             Sr-01-4

-------
    21. Weigh the precipitate and count the  radiostrontium in a
        low-background beta counter.   Repeat the count  In six to seven
        days and calculate the stront1um-90  from the difference in the
        counts.
    22. Regenerate the resin column by flowing  600 ml 4h1 NaCl over the
        column, followed by 1 liter distilled water.

Calculations
    Calculate the concentration,  Z, of strontlum-90 1n  plcocuries per
liter or plcocuries per gram ash  as follows:

       Z = [A] [B]  -  [C] [D]	  X         1	
           [1+(EHF>] (A)  -  [1 +(G)(H)] (C)     (2.22)(I)(J)(K)(L)
where
                              oq
     A     =  decay factor of   Sr from the time of collection  to  the
              time of the first count,
     B     =  net counts per minute of total strontium on second count,
                              OQ
     C     =  decay factor of   Sr from the time of collection  to  the
              time of the second count,
     D     =  net counts per minute of total strontium on first count,
                           on  on
     E     =  ratio of the   Y/  Sr counting efficiencies on the
              second count,
     F     =  90Y ingrowth factor from the time of separation to the
              time of the second count,
              ratio
              count,
              ing row
              first count,
              counting eff
     J     =  chemical yield of strontium,
      =   ratio of the 90Y/90Sr counting efficiencies on the first

                           90
      =   ingrowth factor of   Y from time of separation to time of

                               90
I     =   counting efficiency of   Sr first count,
                                  Sr-01-5

-------
                                    90
     K     =  absorption factor for  Sr, and

     L     =  sample volume in liters or sample weight in grams.




     Calculate the concentration,  Z, of strontium-89 in picocuries per


liter or picocuries per gram ash as follows:




       Z = (D)  -  [1  *  (H)(G)]  (M)   X            1 _
                       A                     (2.22)(0)(J)(H)(L)



where




     D     =  net counts per minute of total  strontium on the first count,

              90
     H     =  ''"Y ingrowth factor from separation to first count,

                           90  90
     G     =  ratio of the   Y/  Sr counting  efficiencies on the first


              count,

                         90                     90
     M     =  net cpm of   Sr (first fraction of   Sr calculation),
                              on
     A     =  decay factor of   Sr from time  of collection to the time


              of first count,

                                    89
     0     =  absorption factor for   Sr,
     J     =  chemical yield of strontium,
                                     89
     N     =  counting efficiency of   Sr,  and


     L     =  sample volume in liters or sample  weight  in grams.
     Calculate the lower limit of detection (LID)  in picocuries per gram

as follows:
                      LLD =     4'66 V  CBT
                            (2.22)(E)(R)(T)(W)


where




     CB    =  background count rate,

     T     =  counting time (same for sample and background),
                                  Sr-01-6

-------
     E     =   beta counter efficiency,
     R     =   fractional chemical yield,
     W     =   sample size  (grams), and
     2.22  =   dpm per pC1.

     This LLD calculation  is  valid If the  sample counting time Is the same
as the background counting time.
Notes
1.  Metricel is a trademark of Gelman Sciences,  Inc., Ann Arbor, Michigan.
2.  For the following types of sample ash,  use  the weights listed Instead
    of the 10 g in step 3 of this procedure:
        Fish ash, 3 g.
        Bone ash, 3 g.  Do not add Ca(N03)2 to  bone.
        Vegetation ash, 5 g.
    For 3 g of ash use 20 g of NaOH pellets and 2 g Na2C03 for
    fusion.  For 5 g of ash use 25 g of NaOH pellets and 3 g Na2C03
    for fusion.
3.  If the fusion mass is not easily removed from the crucible,  it may be
    necessary to add the crucible to the boiling water  to dislodge the
    mass.
4.  If precipitation occurs, increase pH with 6M NH4OH  until clear then
    bring pH back to 3.8 with 6M HC1.

References
1.  Porter, C.R., Procedures for Determination of Stable Elements  and
    Radionuclldes in Environmental Samples, Public  Health Service
    Publication  No. 999-RH-10 (1965).
2.  Velten, R.J., "Resolution of Sr-89 and Sr-90 1n Environmental  Media  by
    an  Instrumental Technique," Nuclear Instruments and Methods, 42,  169
     (1966).
                                  Sr-01-7

-------
3.   Porter, C.R., Kahn, B., Carter,  M.W.,  Rehnberg,  G.L.,  and Pepper,
     E.N., "Determination of Radiostrontlum in Food and Other
     Environmental Samples," Environmental  Science and  Technology,  1,,
     745-750 (1967).
                                  Sr-01-8

-------
           RADIOCHEMICAL  DETERMINATION OF RADIOSTRONTIUM IN MILK

Principle
     Barium and strontium carriers are  added to the milk sample.   Calcium
in the milk is complexed with EDTA to prevent loading the  cation  exchange
resin through which the milk 1s passed.   A one liter sample of milk  is
passed through 85 ml of resin at a rate of up to 100 ml per minute.
Strontium is eluted from the resin and  precipitated.  Strontium-89 and
strontium-90 are radioassayed separately by measuring the  ingrowth of
yttrium-90.

Special Apparatus
     1.  Ion exchange column, 3.2 cm Internal diameter, 15 cm in  length.
     2.  Graduated separatory funnel as reservoir for column, 1 liter
         capacity.
     3.  Netricel DM-800 membrane filters or equivalent, 25 mm diameter,
         0.8 micrometer pore size.  See Note 1.
     4.  Stainless steel  planchets, 5 cm diameter.
     5.  Suction filter apparatus.
     6.  Glassware.
     7.  Desiccator.
     8.  Floor centrifuge.
     9.  pH meter.

Reagents
     1.  Acetic acid, glacial.  Reagent grade HCgH^Og.
     2.  Ammonium acetate buffer, pH5.   Dissolve 153 g ammonium acetate  in
         700 ml distilled water.  Adjust pH to 5 with glacial acetic
         acid.  Dilute to 1 liter with distilled water.
     3.  Ammonium acetate buffer, pH 5.2.  Dissolve 153 g  ammonium acetate
         in 700 ml distilled water.  Adjust pH to 5.2 with glacial acetic
         acid.  Dilute to 1 liter with distilled water.
                                  Sr-02-1

-------
4.  Ammonium hydroxide, 15M.  Reagent grade NH4OH.
5.  Barium carrier, 20 mg Ba+2/ml.   Dissolve 38.1 g Ba(N03)2  in
    900 ml distilled water.  Add 1  ml 16M HN03 and dilute  to  1
    liter with distilled water.
6.  Cation exchange resin, Dowex 50W-X8, 50-100 mesh,  Na*  form,  or
    equivalent.  Wash 85 ml resin (H*) with 600 ml  4M  NaCl  to
    convert resin to Na  form.  Wash all excess NaCl from  resin
    with water and check for chloride with 0.1M AgN03  before  using
    resin.
7.  Ethanol, 95 percent reagent.
8.  Ethylenediamine tertraacetic acid complexing solution.  Dissolve
    216 g Na2EDTA in 2500 ml distilled water.  Add 20  ml each of
    strontium and barium carriers (20 rug/ml).  Then add 200 ml
    ammonium acetate buffer, pH 5.2 and adjust pH to 5.65  with 15M
    ammonium hydroxide.  Dilute to  3 liters.
9.  Ethylenediamine tetraacetic acid disodium salt, Na2EDTA,  3
    percent.  Dissolve 33.3 g of Na2EDTA in 900 ml  distilled  water
    and dilute to 1 liter with distilled water.
10. Nitric acid, 16M.  Reagent grade HN03.
11. Nitric acid 1M.  Dilute 62 ml HN03 to 1 liter with distilled
    water.
12. Silver nitrate, 0.1F1.  Dissolve 1.7 g AgN03 reagent in
    distilled water.  Dilute to 100 ml with distilled  water.  Store
    in brown bottle.
13. Sodium carbonate, 1.5M.  Dissolve 159 g of Na2C03  in 900  ml
    distilled water and dilute to 1 liter with distilled water.
14. Sodium chloride, 1.5M.  Dissolve 87.7 g NaCl  in 900 ml  distilled
    water and dilute to 1 liter with distilled water.
15. Sodium chloride, 4M.  Dissolve  234 g NaCl in 900 ml  distilled
    water and dilute to 1 liter with distilled water.
16. Sodium chromate, 0.25M.  Dissolve 40.5 g Na2Cr04 in 900 ml
    distilled water and dilute to 1 liter with distilled water.
                            Sr-02-2

-------
     17.  Sodium hydroxide, 6M.  Dissolve 240 g HaOH in 900 ml distilled
         water and dilute to  1  liter with distilled water.
     18.  Strontium carrier, 20  mg  Sr*2/ml.  Dissolve 48.3 g Sr(N03)2
         in 900 ml distilled  water.  Add 1 ml 16M HN03 and dilute to 1
         liter with distilled water.
Procedure
     1.   Filter  a  1  liter  sample of milk through cheesecloth and add 300
         ml  of the complexing  solution to the milk sample and mix well.
     2.   Adjust  milk mixture to pH 5.2 with 15M NH4OH using pH meter.
     3.   Pour the  milk  sample  into a  graduated separatory funnel and
         attach  to the  top of  the ion exchange column.
     4.   Open stopcocks on reservoir and column and allow the milk to flow
         through the resin by  gravity that will not exceed 100 ml/min.
     5.   After all the  milk has passed through the column, rinse sides at
         top of  column  with 50 ml water and wash with approximately 200 ml
         water until the effluent runs clear.  Do not let column run dry.
     6.   Add 800 ml  of  3 percent Na^EDTA (pH 5.2) to the reservoir and
         elute through  the column at 20 ml per minute.  Record the time of
         EDTA elution as the beginning of yttrium-90 ingrowth.
     7.   Add 200 ml  distilled  water to reservoir and run through column at
         20  ml per minute.
     8.   Add 200 ml  of  1.5M NaCl to reservoir and pass solution through
         the column  at  a flow  rate of 10 ml per minute.
     9.   Add 1000  ml 4f1 NaCl to reservoir and pass solution through the
         column  at a flow  rate of 20 ml per minute.  Collect the first 400
         ml  of eluate,  which contains strontium and barium, and allow the
         remaining 600  ml  NaCl to pass through the column to regenerate
         the resin.
     10.  Wash all  excess NaCl  from resin with distilled water and check
         eluate  for  chloride with O.M AgN03 before reusing resin.
                                 Sr-02-3

-------
11.  Add 1 ml of W NaOH to the 400 ml  of eluate  from step  9.  Stir
    and slowly add 10 ml of 1.5M Na2C03  to precipitate  SrCO.j.
    Continue vigorous stirring for 30  minutes  using  a magnetic
    stirrer.
12.  Transfer one half of the contents  to a 250 ml  centrifuge bottle.
    Centrifuge at 2000 rpm for 10 minutes and  carefully pour off and
    discard supernate.
13.  Add the remaining solution to the  precipitate  in the 250 ml
    centrifuge bottle.  Centrifuge at  2000 rpm for 10 minutes.  Pour
    off and discard supernate.
14.  Place the centrifuge bottle containing the precipitate in a hot
    water bath held at 70°C.
15.  Add 5 ml 1M_ HN03 to centrifuge bottle to dissolve precipitate.
    Transfer solution to a 50 ml centrifuge tube.
16.  Wash the 250 ml centrifuge bottle  with 5 ml  of ammonium acetate
    buffer, pH5, and add the wash to the dissolved precipitate in the
    50 ml centrifuge tube.
17.  Heat the 50 ml centrifuge tube at  70°C in  a  water bath with
    stirring and slowly add 1 ml of 0.25M^ Na2Cr04  to precipitate
    barium chromate.
18.  Cool tube from step 17 in ice bath,  centrifuge and  decant
    supernate containing strontium into  another  50 ml centrifuge
    tube.  Discard barium chromate precipitate.
19.  Add 2 ml 15M NH4OH to the supernate  with stirring and
    precipitate strontium carbonate by adding  2  ml 1.5J1 Na2C03.
20.  Stir precipitate for ten minutes.  Centrifuge  for five minutes.
    Pour off and discard supernate. .
21.  Add 20 ml of distilled water to tube to wash the precipitate.
    Centrifuge and discard wash solution.  Take  up precipitate in 10
    ml distilled water.  Gently swirl  to break up  precipitate.
22.  Filter sample through a tared membrane filter.  Wash with three
    10 ml aliquots each of water and ethanol.
                             Sr-02-4

-------
    23. Dry sample for one hour in a desiccator, weigh and count in a low
        background beta counter.
    24. Recount sample in six to seven days.

Calculations
    Calculate the concentration,  Z, of strontium-90  in picocuries per
liter or picocuris per gram ash as follows:
       Z = [A] [B]  -  [C] [D]
           [1+(E)(F)3 (A)  -  [1 *(6)(H)]  (C)      (2.22)(I)(J)(K)(L)

where

                              89
     A     =  decay factor of   Sr from the time of  collection to the
              time of the first  count,
     B     =  net counts per minute of total  strontium on second count,
                              on
     C     =  decay factor of   Sr from the time of  collection to the
              time of the second  count,
     D     =  net counts per minute of total  strontium on first count,
                           on  on
     E     =  ratio of the *uY/3USr counting  efficiencies on the
              second count,
              QQ
     F     =    Y ingrowth factor from the time of separation to the
              time of the second count,
              ratio
              count,
              ingrow
              first count,
=  ratio of the 90Y/90Sr counting efficiencies on the first

                      on
   ingrowth factor of   Y from time  of  separation to time of
                                     90
     I     =  counting efficiency of   Sr first count,
     J     =  chemical yield of strontium,
     K     =  absorption factor for   Sr, and
     L     =  sample volume in liters or sample weight  in  grams.
                                  Sr-02-5

-------
     Calculate the concentration,  Z,  of stronti'um-89 In picocuries per
liter or picocuries per gram ash as follows:
where
         Z = (D)  -  [1  +  (H) (G)]  (M)    X
                                           1
                                               (2.22)(0)(J)(N){L)
    0
    H
    G

    M
    A

    0
    J
    N
    L
net counts per minute of total  strontium on the first count,
90
  Y ingrowth factor from separation to  first count,
             90  90
ratio of the   Y/  Sr counting  efficiencies on the first
count,
net cpm of 90Sr (determined by  90Sr calculation),
                89
decay factor of   Sr from time  of collection to the time of
first count,
                      89
absorption factor for   Sr,
chemical yield of strontium,
                       89
counting efficiency of   Sr, and
sample volume in liters or sample weight in grams.
    Calculate the lower limit of detection (LLD)  in picocuries per gram as
follows:
where
                      LLD =
                                4.66-
                            (2.22)(E)(R)(T)(V)
      B
     T
     E
     R
     V
     2.22
 background count rate,
 counting time (same for sample and  background),
 beta counter efficiency,
 fractional chemical yield,
 sample size (liters), and
 dpm per pCi,
                                 Sr-02-6

-------
    This LLD calculation is valid if the sample counting time is  the same
as the background counting time.
Notes
1.  Metrical  is a trademark of Gelman Sciences Inc.,  Ann Arbor,  Michigan.

References
1.  Porter,  C.R., Cahill,  D., Schneider,  R.,  Robbins,  P., Perry, W.,  and
    Kahn, B., "Determination of Stront1um-90  in Milk  by an Ion Exchange
    Method,"  Analytical Chemistry,  33, 1306-1308 (1961).
2.  Porter,  C.R. and Kahn, B., "Improved  Determination of Strontium-90 in
    Milk by  an Ion Exchange Method,"  Analytical Chemistry, 36, 676-8,
    (1964).
3.  Porter,  C., Carter, M. W., Kahn,  B. and Pepper, E. W., Rapid Field
    Method for the Collection of RadionucTides in Milk Proceedings of the
    First International Congress of Radiation Protection, Rome,  Italy
    September 5-10, 1966.
4.  Velten,  R. J., "Resolution of Sr-89 and Sr-90 in  Environmental Media
    by an Instrumental Technique," Nuclear Instruments and Methods, 42,
    1969 (1966).
5.  Rehnberg, G.L., Strong, A.B., Porter, C.R., and Carter, M.W., "Levels
    of Stable Strontium in Milk and the Total Diet,"  Environmental Science
    and Technology, 3, 171-173 (1969).
                                  Sr-02-7

-------
           RADIOCHEMICAL DETERMINATION OF STROMTIUH-90 IN URINE

Principle
     Yttrium carrier in a citric acid solution is added to the urine
sample.  The sample is passed  over an anion exchange resin after adjusting
the pH to 4.5.  Yttrium is eluted from the resin column with HCl and is
precipitated as yttrium oxalate.  The yttrium-90 1s radioassayed on a
low-background beta counter and the activity of strontiuro-90 is calculated.

Special Apparatus
     1.  Centrifuge.
     2.  Ion exchange column,  3.8 cm dia., 18 cm length.
     3.  pN meter.
     4.  Separator/ funnel, 1  liter capacity.
     5.  Suction filter apparatus for 25 tran membrane filter.
     6.  Metricel DM 800 filter membranes or equivalent, 25 RIBI diameter,
         0.8 micrometer pore size.  See Mote 1.

Reagents
     1.  Ammonium hydroxide, 15M, reagent grade HH^OH.
     2.  Anion exchange resin. Dowex 1X8 or equivalent 50-100 mesh,
         chloride form.
     3.  Citric acid, 1M, pH 4.5.  Dissolve 210 g of reagent grade citric
         acid monohydrate in 500 ml distilled water.  Adjust solution to
         pH 4.5 with 12M MaOH  using a pH meter.  Di7ute the solution to 1
         liter.
     4.  Ethanol, 95 percent reagent.
     5.  Hydrochloric acid, 12M, 37 percent HCl reagent.
     6.  Hydrochloric acid, 3M.  Dilute 250 ml of the 37 percent reagent
         grade HCl  to 1 liter with distilled water.
     7.  MerthfoJate solution, 0,1 percent.  Dissolve 1 g sodium
         merthiolate in 1 liter distilled water.
                                 Sr-03-1

-------
     8.  Oxalic acid, 1M.  Dissolve 126 g of C2H204 • 2H20  In  900
         ml of distilled water and dilute to 1  liter.
     9.  Sodium hydroxide, 12M.  Dissolve 480 g reagent grade MaOH in
         400 ml distilled water.   When cool  dilute to 1 liter.
     10. Yttrium carrier, 10 mg Y+3/ml.  Heat,  but avoid boiling,
         12.7 g  Y203 in 50 ml 16M HN03 until dissolved.   Transfer
         to a 1 liter volumetric  flask and dilute to  900 ml.  Adjust to
         pH2 with 15M NH4OH and dilute to 1  liter.
Procedure
     1.  Prior to sample collection,  add 80 ml  of merthiolate to one
         gallon sample container.   At end of collection period  (T^)
         store sample for 10-14 days  for yttrlum-90  ingrowth.
     2.  Measure a 1-liter aliquot into a beaker.  Add 1 ml of yttrium
         carrier to 5 ml of 1M citric acid in a tube.  Swirl to mix and
         transfer quantitatively to the urine in the beaker with distilled
         water.  Stir well.
     3.  Adjust to pH 4.5-5.0 with NaOH using pH meter.  Filter through
         Whatman number 42 filter paper in a 20-cm diameter Buchner funnel
         with vacuum.  Discard filter.
     4.  Transfer filtrate to a 1-liter separator/ funnel and attach  to
         the anion resin column, which  1s filled with distilled water.
     5.  Record the time (T2).  Allow sample to flow through the resin
         at 10 ml per minute.  Discard  the effluent.
     6.  Add 500 ml of distilled water  to the separatory funnel and resume
         flow at 10 ml per minute. Stop flow when just enough water
         remains in the column to cover the resin.
     7.  Add 500 ml 3f1 HC1 to the separatory funnel  and let flow at 2-3 ml
         per minute.  Discard effluent  until pH drops to 2 (check with pH
         paper).  Collect the next 65 ml  of eluate in a 250 ml centrifuge
         bottle.
     8.  Allow remaining acid to pass through the column to recharge  the
                                 Sr-03-2

-------
         resin.  Stir the resin bed well and wash with 500 ml  distilled
         H20.
     9.   Centrifuge  the 65 ml of eluate and transfer supernate to another
         centrifuge  bottle.  Discard any precipitate.
     10.  Add 2 ml of 2h1 oxalic acid to the eluate and adjust to pH 1.6
         with 15M HH4OH (use pH meter).  Heat in a hot water bath for 15
         minutes; then allow to cool to room temperature.
     11.  Centrifuge  and discard the supernate.  Wash the precipitate with
         10  ml distilled water, centrifuge, and discard supernate.
     12.  Weigh a stainless steel planchet and 2.5-cm diameter membrane
         filter.  Place filter in filtering apparatus.
     13.  Transfer precipitate to filter membrane with distilled water.
         Wash with 15 ml distilled water and 30 ml of ethanol.  Continue
         suction for two minutes.
     14.  Transfer the filter with precipitate to the stainless steel
         planchet and weigh the sample to determine yttrium recovery.
     15.  Count in a  low-background beta counter and record the time
         (T3).  Count again after three days to confirm absence of
         contamination of yttrium-90 by other radionuclides.

Calculations
     Calculate the concentration, Z, of strontium-90 in picocuries per 24
hour sample as follows:
                             (A)(B)(EHF)(V2)
where
     C,    =  sample gross counts per minute,
     d,    =  counter background counts per minute,
      o
     V.    =  volume of 24-hour sample  in  liters,
                                 Sr-03-3

-------
    A     =  correction factor for   Y decay (e~xt) where  t  (hours)
             is the time from beginning of analysis to  time  of counting
             (T3-T2),
                                               90       it
    B     =  correction factor for ingrowth of   Y (l-e~AU)  where  t
             (hours) is the time from the end of sample collection period
             to time of beginning of analysis (Tg-Tj),
    E     =  counter efficiency for   Y in cpm/pCi,
    F     =  yttrium oxalate  recovery, and
    Y2   =  aliquot analyzed (liters).

    Calculate  the lower  limit of detection  (LLD) for strontium-90 in
picocuries per  24-hour  sample  as follows:
                     LLD =
                           (A)(B)(E)(F)(Y2)(T)
where
     CB    =  counter background counts per minute,
     V,    =  volume of 24-hour sample in liters,
     A     =  correction factor for 90Y decay (e~xt)  where  t  (hours)
              is'the time from begining of analysis  to time of counting,
     B     =  correction factor for ingrowth of 90Y  (l-e"xt)  where t
              (hours) is the time from the end of  sample collection period
              to time of beginning of analysis,
                                     90
     E     =  counter efficiency for   Y in cpm/pCi,
     F     =  yttrium oxalate recovery, and
     V2    =  aliquot analyzed (liters).

     This LLD is valid only of the background counting time is equal  to
the sample counting time.
                                  Sr-03-4

-------
Notes
1.  Metrfcel  is a trademark of Gel man Sciences Inc.,  Ann Arbor, MI.

References
1.  Cahill, D.F., and Lindsey, G.X.. "Determination of Strontium-90  in
    Urine by Anion Exchange," Analytical  Chemistry, 38, 639 (1966).
                                  Sr-03-5

-------
          RADIOCHEMICAL DETERMINATION  OF  RADIOSTRONTIUM  IN  WATER.
                     SEA WATER  AND  OTHER  AQUEOUS  MEDIA

Principle
     Barium, calcium and strontium carriers are added to the sample.
Magnesium 1s precipitated and removed from the sample at pH 3.8.   Barium
and strontium are adsorbed on a cation exchange resin while calcium Is
eluted.  Barium and strontium are selectively eluted and strontium Is
precipitated.  Strontlum-89 and strontium-90 are radioassayed separately
by measuring Ingrowth of yttrlum-90.  Urine samples are  analyzed  for
strontium using a different procedure.  See Strontlum-90 In Urine.

Special Apparatus
     1.  Graduated separately funnel as reservoir for column, 1 liter
         capacity.
     2.  Ion exchange column, 2.5 cm Internal diameter,  18 cm long.
     3.  Metrice! DM 800 membrane filters or equivalent, 25 mm diameter,
         0.8 micrometer pore size.   See Note 1.
     4.  Stainless steel planchets, 5 cm diameter.
     5.  Suction filter apparatus.
     6.  Glassware.
     7.  Whatman 2V fluted filter paper or equivalent.
     8.  Magnetic stirrer and stirring bars.

Reagents
     1.  Acetic acid, glacial.   Reagent grade HC2H302.
     2.  Ammmonlum hydroxide, 15M.   Reagent grade NH^OH.
     3.  Ammonium hydroxide, 6f1.  Dilute 400 ml NH4OH reagent to  1 liter
         with distilled water.
                                 +2
     4.  Barium carrier, 20 mg  Ba  /ml.  Dissolve 38.2 g Ba(NO,)2 in
         900 ml distilled water.  Add 1 ml  16M HN03 and  dilute to 1
         liter with distilled water.
                                 Sr-04-1

-------
                           +2
5.  Barium carrier, 5 mg Ba  /ml.   Dissolve 9.5  g  Ba(N03)2  in
    900 ml distilled water.  Add 1 ml  16M HN03 and dilute to 1
    liter with distilled water.
6.  Calcium nitrate, 2M.  Dissolve 47.2  g Ca(N03)2»4H20 in
    distilled water and dilute to 100  ml  with distilled water.
7.  Cation exchange resin.  Dowex 50UX8,  50-100  mesh,  Na  form, 40
    ml per column.  Wash resin (H+) with 600 ml  4M NaCl to  convert
    resin to Na  form.  Wash all excess  NaCl  from  resin with water
    and check effluent wash water for  chloride with 0.1M AgN03
    before using resin.
8.  Ethanol, 95 percent reagent.
9.  Ethylenediamine tetraacetic acid,  disodium salt.  Na2EDTA
    reagent powder.
10. Ethylenediamine tetraacetic acid,  disodium salt, Ma2EDTA, 3
    percent.  Dissolve 33.3 g of Na2 EDTA in 900 ml distilled water
    and dilute to 1 liter with distilled water.
11. Ethylenediamine tetraacetic acid,  d1sodium salt, Na2EDTA, 2
    percent.  Dissolve 22.2 g of Na2 EDTA in 900 ml distilled water
    and dilute to 1 liter with distilled water.
12. Hydrochloric acid, 12M.  Reagent grade HC1.
13. Hydrochloric acid, 6M.  Dilute 500 ml reagent  grade HC1 to  1
    liter with distilled water.
14. Hydrochloric acid, 1.5M.  Dilute 125 ml reagent grade HC1 to  1
    liter with distilled water.
15. Nitric acid, 16^.  Reagent grade HN03.
16. Silver nitrate, 0.1M.  Dissolve 1.7g AgN03 reagent in distilled
    water.  Add 1 ml 16M HN03 and dilute to 100  ml with distilled
    water.  Store in brown bottle.
17. Sodium acetate buffer, pH 4.6.  Dissolve 200 g NaC2H302 in
    400 ml distilled water.  Adjust pH to 4.6 with glacial  acetic
    acid.  Dilute to 1 liter with distilled water.
                             Sr-04-2

-------
     18.  Sodium carbonate,  1.5M.   Dissolve  159  g of Na2C03 in 900 ml
         distilled water and dilute  to  1  liter  with distilled water.
     19.  Sodium chloride, 4M.  Dissolve 234 g of NaCl  in 900 ml distilled
         water and dilute to 1  liter with distilled water.
     20.  Sodium hydroxide,  6M.   Dissolve  240 g  of  NaOH  in 900 ml distilled
         water and dilute to 1  liter with distilled water.
     21.  Strontium carrier, 20  mg Sr*2/ml.   Dissolve 48.3 g Sr(N03)2
         in 900 ml water.  Add  1 ml  16M HN03 and dilute to 1 liter with
         distilled water.

Procedure
     1.  Acidify a 3.78 liter (one gallon)  sample  with  2 ml of 6M HC1.
     2.  Mix thoroughly and filter through  a fluted filter paper.
     3.  Place a one liter  aliquot of the sample In a  2 liter beaker.
     4.  Add 2 ml  of strontium  carrier, 1 ml of barium  carrier and 2 ml of
         calcium nitrate solution.   Stir  well.
     5.  For fresh water samples,  proceed to step  6; for sea water
         samples,  pretreat  as directed  in steps 5  a through 5 g.
         (a) Heat sample to near boiling  on a hot  plate.
         (b) Adjust pH to 10 with approximately 10 ml  of 6M NaOH.
         (c) Add 30 ml of 1.5M  Na2C03 with  stirring.
         (d) Continue heating until  precipitate settles to the bottom of
             the beaker.
         (e) Remove sample  from the  hot plate and  allow solution to cool
             to room temperature.
         (f) Decant supernate.   Transfer  precipitate to a 250 ml
             centrifuge bottle  with  distilled water.   Centrifuge and
             discard supernate.
         (g) Dissolve precipitate in 30 ml  of 6M HC1 and add to 500 ml of
             3 percent disodium EDTA.   Go to step  7.
     6.  Add 33.3 g disodium EDTA powder  to the fresh water sample from
         step 5 and stir until  dissolution  of the  powder is complete.
                                 Sr-04-3

-------
7.  Adjust sample to pH 3.8 with pH meter using  15M  NH4OH or 6M HC1.
8.  Stir vigorously for 75 minutes using a magnetic  stlrrer to
    precipitate the magnesium salt of EDTA.
9.  Filter, If necessary, and adjust filtrate  to pH  4.6 with
    approximately 2 ml  of 15M NH4OH.
10. Add 20 ml of sodium acetate buffer solution, pH  4.6 and readjust
    to pH 4.6 with approximately 4 ml of 15M NH4OH.
11. Pass the 1-Hter sample through resin column at  20 ml per
    minute.  Stop the flow when enough solution  remains to cover
    resin.
12. Adjust 600 ml of the 2 percent disodium EDTA to  pH 5.1 with 6M
    NH4OH.
13. Place the 2 percent disodium EDTA from step  12 In the column
    reservoir and let flow through the resin column  at 20 ml per
    minute.
14. Record time at end of elutlon In step 13 as  beginning of
    yttrium-90 Ingrowth.
15. Wash the column with 200 ml water at a flow  rate of 20 ml per
    minute and discard all effluents.
16. Place 460 ml 1.5J1 HC1 in reservoir and elute at  a flow rate of  8
    ml per minute, discarding the first 60 ml  of effluent.
17. Collect the next 400 ml, which contain the strontium fraction.
18. Add 200 ml 15*1 NH^OH to the strontium fraction from step 17 and
    stir with a magnetic stirrer.  Slowly add  10 ml  1.5M Na2C03
    solution and stir vigorously for 30 minutes.
19. Collect the strontium carbonate precipitated in  step 18 on a
    weighed membrane filter.  Wash with three  10 ml  aliquots each of
    water and ethanol.  Transfer to a planchet and dry for 1 hour in
    a desiccator.
20. Weigh the strontium carbonate to the nearest 0.1 mg and count the
    radiostrontium in a low-background beta counter.
21. Count the sample again after six to seven  days and calculate the
    strontium-90.

                             Sr-04-4

-------
     22.   Regenerate the cation exchange resin by elutlng 600  ml  of  4P1
           NaCl through the column at 8 ml/minute.  Wash the  resin with
           water until all chlorides are removed by checking  with  a silver
           nitrate solution.

Calculations
     Calculate the concentration, Z, of strontium-90 in picocuries per
liter or picocuries per gram ash as follows:

       Z = [A] [B]  -  [C] [D]                 X          1
           C1+(E)(F)] (A)  -  [1 +(G)(H)] (C)     (2.22)(I)(J)(K)(L)
where

                              89
     A     =  decay factor of   Sr from the time of  collection  to  the
              time of the first count,
     B     =  net counts per minute of  total  strontium on  second count,
                              QQ
     C     =  decay factor of   Sr from the time of  collection  to  the
              time of the second  count,
     D     =  net counts per minute of  total  strontium on  first count,
                           on  on
     E     =  ratio of the *uY/*uSr counting  efficiencies  on  the last
              co.unt,
              90
     F     =    Y ingrowth factor from  the time of separation to the
              time of the last count,
              ratio
              count,
              ingrow
              first count,
              counting eff
     J     =  chemical yield of strontium,
                                    90
     K     =  absorption factor for   Sr,
     L     =  sample volume in liters  or sample weight  in  grams.
                      on  on
      =  ratio of the ""Y/^Sr  counting  efficiencies on the first

                           90
         ingrowth factor of  Y from time  of  separation to time of
                                on
I     =  counting efficiency  of   Sr first count,
                              >nt1
                               90
K     =  absorption factor for    Sr, and
                                 Sr-04-5

-------
    Calculate the concentration,  Z,  of strontium-89  In picocurles per


liter or picocurles per gram ash as  follows:




          Z • (D)  -  [1  *  (H)(G)] (M)   X           1
                        A                    (2.22)(0)(J)(N)(L)


where





     D     =  net counts per minute of total  strontium on the first count,

              90
     H     =    Y ingrowth factor from separation  to  first count,

                           on  on
     G     =  ratio of the 3UY/*uSr counting  efficiencies on the first


              count,


     M     =  net cpm of   Sr (first fraction of    Sr calculation),

                              89
     A     =  decay factor of   Sr from time  of collection to the time


              of first count,
                                    on

     0     =  absorption factor for °'Sr,


     J     =  chemical yield of strontium,
                                     on

     N     =  counting efficiency of   Sr,  and


     L     =  sample volume In liters or sample weight in grams.




     Calculate the lower limit of detection (LLD)  in  picocuries per liter


as follows:
                      LLD =     4'66
                            (2.22)(E)(R)(T)(V)


where




     CB    =  background count rate,


     T     =  counting time (same for sample and background),

     2.22  =  dpm per pCI,

     E     =  beta counter efficiency,

     R     =  fractional chemical yield,  and


     V     =  sample size (liters).





                                  Sr-04-6

-------
     This LLD calculation is valid if the sample counting time  is same as
the background counting time.
Notes
1.  Metricel  is a trademark of Gelman Sciences,  Inc., Ann Arbor, Michigan.

References
1.  Porter,  C.R., Procedures for Determination of  Stable Elements and
    Radionuclides in Environmental  Samples,  Public Health Service
    Publication No.  999-RH-10 (1965).
2.  Velten,  R.J., "Resolution of Sr-89 and Sr-90 in Environmental Media by
    an Instrumental  Technique," Nuclear Instruments and Methods, 42yU69
    (1966).
3.  Porter,  C.R., Kahn,  B., Carter,  M.W.,  Rehnberg, G.I., and Pepper,
    E.W., "Determination of Radiostrontium in  Food and Other Environmental
    Samples," Environmental Science and Technology, 1, 745-750  (1967).
                                 Sr-04-7

-------
                PREPARATION OF THORIUM-234 TRACER SOLUTION

Principle
    Uranium Is adsorbed on an anlon exchange resin in  strong  HC1.   The
thorium-234 decay product is periodically eluted with  strong  HC1.   The
eluted thorium is further purified by passing the eluted solution  through
a second column of anion exchange resin.   The final  thorium-234 solution
is radioassayed by coprecipitation with lanthanum as fluoride and  beta
counted.  The solution is also checked for uranium contamination by
coprecipitation for uranium with lanthanum as fluoride.   The  coprecipitate
is radioassayed by alpha spectroscopy.

Special Apparatus
    1.  Ion exchange columns, 5 cm internal diameter,  15 cm length; 2.5 cm
        internal diameter, 14 cm length.
    2.  Nuclepore filter membranes, 25 mm dia., 0.2 micrometer pore size
        or equivalent.  See Note 1.
    3.  Planchets, stainless steel, 32 mm diameter.
    4.  Separatory funnels, 250 ml capacity as reservoirs for the  ion
        exchange columns.
    5.  Suction filter apparatus for 25 mm membrane.
    6.  Plastic graduated cylinder, 100 ml volume.
    7.  Alpha spectrometric system consisting of multichannel analyzer,
        biasing electronics, printer, silicon surface  barrier detectors,
        vacuum pump and chamber.

Reagents
    1.  Anion exchange resin.  Dowex 1X8, 100-200 mesh,  chloride form.
    2.  Ethanol, 95 percent reagent.
    3.  Hydrochloric acid, 12M, 37 percent HC1 reagent.
    4.  Hydrochloric acid, 1M.  Dilute 83 ml of the 37 percent reagent
        grade HC1 to 1 liter with distilled water.
                                  Th-01-1

-------
     5.  Hydrofluoric add, 29M,  48 percent  HF  reagent.
     6.  Hydrofluoric acid, 3M.  Dilute 104  ml  of  the  48 percent reagent
         grade HF to 1 liter with distilled  water.   Use a plastic
         graduated cylinder and storage bottle.
     7.  Lanthanum carrier, 0.1 mg La  /ml.   Dissolve  0.0779  g  high
         purity La(N03)3* 6H20 per 250 ml  1M HC1.
     8.  Titanium trichloride, 20 percent  reagent  grade.
     9.  Titanium trichloride, 0.4 percent.   Dilute  1  ml of the 20
         percent  T1C13 to 50 ml  with 1 M  HC1.   Prepare fresh dally.
     10. Uranyl acetate or other uranium salt.   Reagent grade crystals.
Procedure
     1.  Slurry the anion exchange resin with  distilled water  in a beaker
         and fill  both columns to within 2 cm  from  the top of  the column.
     2.  Place the reservoirs on top of the columns and wash the resin by
         passing 200 ml water through the columns.  Always maintain a
         level of liquid above the top of the  resin bed.
     3.  Pass 300 ml of 12M HC1 through the larger  column at the rate of
         approximately 5 ml per minute.
     4.  Dissolve the uranium salt in 300 ml of  12M HC1 and pass this
         solution through the larger column.
     5.  Pass 300 ml 12M HC1 through the larger  column following the
         uranium solution.
     6.  Discard the eluate and record the date  the acid was passed
         through the resin.
     7.  In approximately 14 days,  pass 300 ml 12M  HC1 through the column
         with the adsorbed uranium at a rate of  3 ml/minute .   Collect the
         eluate containing the thorium-234.  See Note 2.
     8.  Pass 200 ml 12M HC1 through the smaller column at a rate of 5
         ml/minute.  Discard the eluate.
     9.  Pass the eluate from the larger column  (step 7) through the
         second column at a rate of 3 ml/minute.
                                 Th-01-2

-------
10. Wash the second column with 100 ml  12M HC1,  collecting  the  total
    eluate.
11. Evaporate the total  acid solution just to dry ness.
12. Dissolve in 250 ml  1M HC1  and filter into a  storage  bottle.
13. Remove at least four 1 ml  aliquots  of the thorium-234 tracer
    solution, transfer to 100 ml beakers and evaporate to dryness.
14. Add 15 ml Ifl HC1 to the residue in  each beaker and warm to
    approximately 50°C.
15. Add 1 ml of lanthanum carrier and 5 ml of 3N HF to each sample.
    Mix well and set aside for 30 minutes.
16. Using suction, filter coprecipitated samples through filter
    membranes.
17. Rinse each sample beaker with 10 ml water and  add to filter
    funnel.   Rinse each beaker with 10  ml ethanol  and add to funnel.
18. Remove clamp and top of funnel with suction  on.  Allow  membrane
    to dry.
19. Mount individual membrane carefully on 32 mm planchet using
    double stick tape.
20. Count each coprecipitated sample for thorium-234 on  a beta
    counter.
21. Each batch of thorium-234 coming from the uranium column in step
    7 should be checked for uranium contamination  by evaporating  a 1
    ml aliquot and coprecipitating for  uranium in  the following
    manner.
22. Add 15 ml 1M HC1 to the residue from step 21 and warm to
    approximately 50°C.
23. Add 1 ml of 0.4 percent TiClj to reduce the  uranium.
24. Add 1 ml of the lanthanum carrier and 5 ml of  3M HF. Mix well
    and set aside for 30 minutes.
25. Using suction, filter coprecipitated sample  through  a filter
    membrane.
                             Th-01-3

-------
    26. Rinse sample beaker with 10 ml  water  and  add  to filter funnel.
        Rinse beaker with 10 ml  ethanol and add to  funnel.
    27. Remove clamp and top of funnel  with suction on.  Allow membrane to
        dry.
    28. Mount membrane carefully on 32  mm planchet  using double stick tape.
    29. Count sample for 1000 minutes on alpha  spectrometer.  See Mote 3.
Notes
1.  Nuclepore is a trademark of Nuclepore  Corp.,  Pleasanton, CA.
2.  The thorium-234 should be removed from the uranium-containing column
    every 14 days regardless of need.  Longer periods  of  time between
    elutions result in the appearance of small quantities of thorium-230
    in the eluate.
3.  If uranium is in the tracer solution,  it must be removed by further
    treatment with anion exchange resin before use.

References
1.  Volchok, H. L. and dePlanque, G., editors, EML Procedures Manual. 25th
    Ed., Environmental Measurement Labatory,  U.S.  Department of Energy,
    New York.
                                 Th-01-4

-------
                PREPARATION OF URANIUM-232 TRACER SOLUTION

Principle
     Uranium-232 has a half-life of 72 years and decays to thorium-228,
which has a half-life of 1.9 years.  In order to prevent contamination of
samples with thorium-228 and its decay products, any stock of uranium-232
must be periodically decontaminated before use.  This should be done on an
annual basis.
     Uranium-232 is extracted Into tr1isooctylamine (TIOA).  The TIOA is
washed with a mixture of HC1 and HF for decontamination.  Uranium Is
stripped from the TIOA with dilute nitric acid and wet ashed.  Aliquots of
the cleaned uranium tracer are copredpltated with lanthanum flouride and
radioassayed by alpha spectroscopy to determine the specific activity of
the tracer solution.

Special Apparatus
     1.  Nuclepore filter membranes, 25 mm dia., 0.2 micrometer pore size
         or equivalent.  See Note 1.
     2.  Planchets, stainless steel, 32 mm diameter.
     3.  Plastic graduated cylinder.
     4.  Separatory funnels, 1 liter capacity.
     5.  Suction filter apparatus for 25 mm membrane.
     6.  Alpha spectrometrie system consisting of multichannel analyzer,
         biasing electronics, printer, silicon surface barrier detectors,
         vacuum pump and chamber.

Reagents
     1.  Ascorbic acid, crystalline reagent.
     2.  Ethanol, 95 percent reagent.
     3.  Hydrochloric acid, 12 M_.  37 percent HC1 reagent.
     4.  Hydrochloric acid, 9 M.  Dilute 750 ml of the 37 percent reagent
         grade HC1 to 1 liter with distilled water.
                                  U-01-1

-------
     5.  Hydrochloric acid, 3 M/Hydrofluoric  acid,  0.1 ^mixture.  Dilute
         250 ml of the 37 percent reagent grade HC1 and 3.5 ml of the 48
         percent reagent grade HF to 1  liter  with distilled water.  Store
         In a plastic bottle.
     6.  Hydrochloric acid, 1 M.  Dilute 83 ml of the 37 percent reagent
         grade HC1 to 1 liter with distilled  water.
     7.  Hydrofluoric acid, 29 M.  48 percent HF reagent.
     8.  Hydrofluoric add, 3 M.  Dilute 104  ml of  the 48 percent reagent
         grade HF to 1 liter with distilled water.  Use a plastic
         graduated cylinder and storage bottle.
     9.  Hydrogen peroxide, 50 percent  reagent grade.
     10. Lanthanum carrier, 0.1 mg La  /ml.  Dissolve 0.0799 g
         La(N03)3« 6H20 per 250 ml 1 M  HC1.
     11. Nitric acid, 16 M.  70 percent HN03  reagent.
     12. Nitric acid, 0.1 M.  Dilute 6  ml of  the 70 percent reagent grade
         HN03 to 1 liter with distilled water.
     13. Titanium trichloride, 20 percent reagent grade.
     14. Titanium trichloride, 0.4 percent.  Dilute 1 ml of the 20 percent
         T1C13 to 50 ml with distilled  water. Prepare fresh daily.
     15. Triisooctylamine (TIOA), reagent grade.
     16. TIOA solution 1n p-xylene, 10  percent.  Dissolve 100 ml of the
         triisooctylamlne in p-xylene and dilute to 1 liter with p-xylene.
     17. p-Xylene, reagent grade.
Procedure
     1.  From the specific activity of the uranium-232  stock  solution,
         determine the size of the aliquot to be used so  that when diluted
         it will result in a final solution of approximately  1  pCi
         232U/ml.
                                  232
     2.  Evaporate the aliquot of    U to dry ness in a  beaker.
     3.  Add 10 ml of 12 M^ HC1 and evaporate to dryness.
     4.  Add 100 ml 9 M HC1 to the beaker and warm to 50°C.
                                  U-01-2

-------
5.  Add 10 drops of 50 percent hydrogen peroxide  to  the  solution.
6.  Equilibrate 100 ml of the 10 percent TIOA solution with  50 ml of
    warm 9 M HC1 by shaking in a separatory  funnel for one minute.
7.  Allow the layers to separate and discard the  lower aqueous acid
    phase.
8.  Add the solution from step 5 to the TIOA in the  separatory funnel
    and shake funnel for two minutes.
9.  Allow phases to separate and discard the lower aqueous acid  phase,
10. Wash the TIOA solution with 50 ml 9 M HC1 wanned to  50°C.  Shake
    for one minute and discard lower aqueous acid phase  when
    separated.
11. Wash the TIOA solution with 75 ml of 3 M HC1/0.1 M HF wanned to
    50°C.  Shake funnel for two minutes and  discard  lower acid phase
    when separated.  Repeat this step.
12. Strip the uranium tracer from the TIOA solution  by adding 100 ml
    0.1 M HN03 to the separatory funnel and  shaking  the  funnel for
    two minutes.
13. Allow phases to separate; withdraw and save lower acid phase.
14. Repeat steps 12 and 13 and combine strip solutions.
15. Place combined strip solutions in clean  separatory funnel.
16. Add 100 ml p-xylene to combined strip solution and shake funnel
    for one minute.
17. Allow phases to separate cleanly; withdraw lower aqueous acid
    layer into a beaker.  Discard p-xylene.
18. Evaporate solution from step 17 to dryness.  Do  not  overheat.
19. Add 10 ml 12 M HC1 to residue in beaker  and take to  dryness. Do
    not overheat.
20. Take up solution in 250 ml 1 M HC1 and filter through a  filter
    membrane using suction.
21. Coprecipitate 1 ml aliquots of the stock solution in step 20 by
    adding each aliquot to 15 ml 1 M HC1 in  a beaker.
22. Add 50 mg ascorbic acid to each beaker.
                             U-01-3

-------
    23.  Add 1  ml  0.4 percent TiClj  to  reduce uranium.
    24.  Add 1  ml  of lanthanum carrier  and  5 ml of 3 M HF.  Mix well and
        set aside for 30 minutes to precipitate  LaF3 carrying uranium.
    25.  Using  suction, filter coprecipitated sample through a filter
        membrane.
    26.  Rinse  sample beaker with 10 ml  water and add to filter funnel.
        Rinse  beaker with 10 ml  ethanol and add  to funnel.
    27.  Remove clamp and top of  funnel  with suction on.  Allow membrane to
        dry.
    28.  Mount  membrane carefully on 32 mm  planchet using double  stick tape.
    29.  Count  sample for 1000 minutes  on alpha  spectrometer.
Notes
1.  Nuclepore is a registered trademark of Nuclepore Corp.,  Pltfasanton,  CA.

References
1.  Volchok, H. L. and dePlanque, G., editors,  EML Procedures  Manual,  25th
    Ed., Environmental Measurement Laboratory,  U.S. Department of Energy,
    New York.
                                  U-01-4

-------
         RADIOCHEMICAL  DETERMINATION OF GROSS ALPHA AND GROSS BETA
                        PARTICLE ACTIVITY IN WATER

    The water sample is evaporated onto a stainless  steel  planchet and
counted for gross activity.  This procedure provides a  rapid screening
measurement to indicate whether specific  analyses are required.

Special Apparatus
    1.  Conductivity meter.
    2.  Hot plates.
    3.  Drying lamps.
    4.  Stainless steel planchets, 5 cm diameter.
    5.  Pleated filter paper, 32 nrni diameter.
    6.  Muffle furnace.

Procedure
    If some samples require separating the dissolved solids from the
undissolved solids, acidify with HN03 and—
    1.  Filter the water sample with pleated filter  paper.  Dry  and  ash
        filter paper at 500°C for 12 to 24 hours.
    2.  Determine the dissolved solid content of the filtrate by measuring
        the conductivity and determining the solids  from Figure  1.   This
        is to determine the volume to be evaporated. The maximum sample
        thickness should be less than 5mg/cm2 (on 20 cm2 area, i.e.
        100 rag).
    3.  Transfer the specific volume of water to a beaker and evaporate to
        a small volume on a hot plate.  Avoid dryness.
    4.  Transfer residue from beaker to a tared stainless steel  planchet
        using a rubber policeman and as little distilled water as possible.
    5.  Dry under a heat lamp, flame over a burner until  dull red, cool,
        weigh and store in a desiccator.   See Note 1.
    6.  Count for gross alpha and gross beta particle activity.
    7.  Repeat steps 4, 5, and 6 for the ash, If necessary.

                                  00-01-1

-------
Calculations
    Calculate the concentration,  Z,  of gross alpha or beta in picocuries
per liter as follows:
                                 CI-CB
                             (2.22)(A)(V)(F)
where

     Cj    =  sample counts per minute,
     CB    =  background counts per minute,
     A     =  counting efficiency for natural uranium,
     V     =  sample volume (liters),
     F     =  self absorption factor  from Table 1 or Table 2 based on dry
              sample weight, and
     2.22  =  dpm per pCi.

     Calculate the lower limits of detection  (LLD) as follows:
                      LLD=     4.66V-V
                            (2.22)(A)(V)(F)(T)
where

     CB    =  background counts per minute,
     T     =  counting time,
     A     =  counting efficiency for natural uranium,
     V     =  sample volume (liters),
     F     =  self-absorption factor  from Table 1 or 2 based on sample
              weight, and
     2.22  =  dpm per pCi.

     This LLD calculation Is valid If the sample counting time Is equal  to
the background counting time.

                                 00-01-2

-------
                     TABLE 1





Alpha Particle Absorption Factor vs Sample Weight
Sample Weight, mg
0
5
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
55
60
65
70
75
80
90
100
110
120
130
140
150
160
Alpha Absorption Factor
1.0
.95
.90
.84
.79
.74
.69
.64
.59
.55
.50
.45
.42
.40
.38
.36
.35
.34
.33
.32
.30
.29
.28
.27
.27
                     00-01-3

-------
                                  TABLE  2

             Beta Particle Absorption Factor vs Sample Weight

*
Sample Weight, mg
less than 40
40
45
50
55
60
65
70
75
80
85
90
95
100
2
For sample thickness, mg/cm ,
weight by 20.

Beta Absorption Factor
1.000
.989
.982
.975
.968
.961
.954
.947
.940
.933
.926
.919
.912
.905
on 5 cm dia. planchet, divide sample

Notes
1.  Flaming the planchet will result In the loss of polonium-210,  If
    present.
                                  00-01-4

-------
References
1.  Analysis of RadionucTides In Water.   Training  Course Manual, U.S.
    Department of Health,  Education,  and Welfare,  Public Health Service
    (1965).
                                 00-01-5

-------
    100.000
 Q.
     10,000- •
o
O
      1.000- •
       200
                                                          100
500
                                        Volume, mL
                             Figure 1.   Conductivity vs. volume.


                                         00-01-6

-------
 
-------
          RADIOCHEMICAL DETERMINATION OF GROSS ALPHA ACTIVITY IN
                    DRINKING WATER BY COPRECIPITATION

Principle
     An aliquot of drinking  water  is acidified with H2S04.  Barium
carrier is added to precipitate barium sulfate and the sample is digested
while wanning up to 50°C for 30 minutes.   Iron carrier is then added.
After 30 minutes the sample  is  neutralized with dilute NH^OH to
precipitate ferric hydroxide.   The sample  is filtered and the precipitate
is radioassayed after drying.   This procedure precipitates radium and all
alpha and beta emitting actinide elements.

Special Apparatus
     1.  Drying lamp.
     2.  Filter membranes, 47 mm dia., 0.45 micrometer pore size.
     3.  Glassware.
     4.  Magnetic stirrer and stirring bars.
     5.  Planchets, stainless steel, 5 cm  diameter.
     6.  Low background internal proportional alpha counter.

Reagents
     1.  Ammonium hydroxide, 6NL  Dilute 400 ml reagent grade NH^OH to 1
         liter with distilled water.
                                +2
     2.  Barium carrier, 5 mg Ba  /ml.  Dissolve 4.4 g BaCl2«2H20
         in 500 ml distilled water.
     3.  Bromocresol purple, 0.1 percent.  Dissolve 100 mg of the water
         soluble reagent in  100 ml distilled water.
     4.  Iron carrier, 5 mg  Fe+3/ml.  Dissolve 17.5 g Fe(M03)3 • 9H20
         in 200 ml distilled water containing 2 ml 16M HN03.
         Dilute to 500 ml.
     5.  Nitric acid,  16M, 70 percent HN03 reagent.
                                 00-02-1

-------
     6.   SuIfuric acid,  1M.   Dilute 55 ml of the 96 percent reagent grade
         H2S04 to 1 liter with distilled water.
Procedure
     1.  Use a measured aliquot of water sample.  If the sample is less
         than 500 ml, dilute to 500 ml with distilled water.
     2.  If the sample used is preserved with acid, neutralize to color
         change with 6M^ NH^OH using 1 ml bromocresol purple.
     3.  Add 20 ml 111 HpSO* and flush the radon from the sample by
         boiling for two minutes.
     4.  Allow the sample to stand for three hours for radon progeny to
         decay.
     5.  Place sample on a magnetic stirrer/heater and add 1 ml barium
         carrier.
     6.  Heat the sample to approximately 50°C with stirring for 30
         minutes.
     7.  Add 1 ml iron carrier and 1 ml bromocresol purple reagent.
     8.  Continue stirring and add 6M NH.OH dropwise to the sample until
         the indicator changes color.
     9.  Continue wanning and stirring for another 30 minutes.
     10. Filter sample through a membrane and wash precipitate with 25 ml
         distilled water.
     11. Mount the filter membrane on a planchet using double stick tape.
     12. Carefully dry the precipitate and count for alpha activity.
     13. Prepare a reagent blank precipitate to determine reagent
         background.
     14. Store samples in a desiccator or dry carefully under a heat lamp
         if recounted at a later date.
Calculations
     Calculate the concentration,  Z,  of  gross alpha  in picocuries per
                                 00-02-2

-------
liter as follows:
                               (2.22)(E)(V)
where

     E     =  counter efficiency (see Note 1),
     V     =  volume analyzed (liters),
     2.22  =  dpm/pCi,
     C.    =  sample (counts per minute),  and
     CD    =  reagent blank (counts per  minute).
      o

     Calculate the lower limit of detection (LLD),  as  follows:
                       LLD =
                             (2.22)(E)(V)(T)
where

     CB    =  reagent background,  counts per  minute,
     T     =  counting time,
     E     =  counter efficiency,
     V     =  sample volume (liters),  and
     2.22  =  dpm/pCi.

     This LLD calculation is valid if the sample counting  time  is equal to
the background counting time.
Notes
1.  Determine counter efficiency by coprecipitating  standardized  aliquots
    of alpha-emitting actinide solutions.  As an example,  a  known quantity
                                  00-02-3

-------
of plutonlum 1s added to a 500 ml volume of water.   The  plutonlum Is
copreclpltated by using the procedure described,  counted and  the  counting
efficiency determined.  Other alpha emitters such as uranium  may  also be
used In the manner described.  At least six determinations  should be  made
with each standard used.

References
1.  Krleger, H.L., and Whlttaker, E.L., Prescribed  Procedures for
    Measurement of Radioactivity in Drinking Water, EPA-600/4-80-032,
    Environmental Monitoring and Support Laboratory, Office of Research
    and Development, U.S. Environmental Protection  Agency,  Cincinnati,
    Ohio (August 1980).
                                  00-02-4

-------
         RADIOCHEMICAL DETERMINATION OF LEAD-210  AMD  POLOHIUM-210
                  IN  DRY  INORGANIC AND  BIOLOGICAL SAMPLES

Principle
     Polonium-209 and bismuth-207 tracers and lanthanum carrier are added
to a weighed aliquot of sample which has been dried at 100°C for 24
hours.  The sample Is solubilized by wet ashing.  The radloelements are
coprecl pita ted as hydroxide with MH.OH.  The hydroxide is redissolved in
acid and the bismuth and polonium are spontaneously deposited on a clean
copper disc.
                                 210
     The disc is beta counted for   Bi, gamma assayed by Ge(Li) for
207                                              209       210
   Bi and radioassayed by alpha spectroscopy for    Po and    Po.
    210
The    Pb can be determined by measuring ingrowth of  its decay daughter
210Bi which has a half-life of 5 days.

Special Apparatus
     1.  Copper discs made from 0.6  mm thick copper sheet.  Discs are 2.2
         cm diameter with a 0.3 cm hole set  0.15  cm in from the edges.
         The discs are coated on one side with an acid-resistant paint.
     2.  Constant temperature bath maintained at  80°C.  Glycerol is used
         as heat transfer fluid.
     3.  Teflon beakers.   See Mote 1.
     4.  Centrifuge.
     5.  Magnetic stirrer and stirring  bars.
     6.  Glassware.
     7.  Alpha spectrometrie system  consisting of multichannel analyzer,
         biasing electronics, printer,  silicon surface barrier detector,
         vacuum pump and  chamber.

Reagents
     1.  Ascorbic acid, crystalline  reagent.
     2.  Ammonium hydroxide, 15M,  reagent grade NH4OH.
                                 00-03-1

-------
     3.   Hydrochloric  acid,  12M, 37 percent HC1 reagent.
     4.   Hydrochloric  acid,  6M.  Dilute 500 ml of the 37 percent reagent
         grade  HC1  to  1  liter with distilled water.
     5.   Hydrofluoric  acid,  29M, 48 percent HF reagent.
     6.   Lanthanum  carrier,  10 mg La+3/ml.  Dissolve 7.8g high purity
         La(N03)3*  6H20  in 250 ml distilled water.
     7.   Nitric acid,  16M, 70 percent HN03 reagent.
     8.   Bismuth-207 tracer solution.  Approximately 10 pCi/ml.
     9.   Polonium-209 tracer solution.  Approximately 1 pCi/ml.
Procedure
     1.  Add measured aliquot of Bi-207 and Po-209  tracers and  1 ml
         lanthanum carrier to weighed one gram aliquot  of sample in a
         Teflon beaker.
     2.  Add 15 ml 29M HF and 10 ml  16M HN03 and evaporate to near
         dryness.  Repeat this step.
     3.  Add three successive 10 ml  volumes of 6f1 HC1.   Evaporate to near
         dryness following each addition.
     4.  Take up sample in 40 ml 6M HC1 and cover with  watch glass while
         warming sample for 30 minutes.
     5.  Transfer dissolved sample to 250 ml centrifuge bottle.
     6.  Make sample basic with careful addition of 15M NH4OH with
         stirring.
     7.  Allow sample to stand for 30 minutes and centrifuge after
         precipitate has formed.
     8.  Pour off supernate.  Wash precipitate with 25  ml water.
         Centrifuge and pour off wash water.
     9.  Dissolve precipitate by adding 1-ml increments of  12M  HC1.  Use
         stirring rod to break up precipitate, using minimum amount  of HC1.
     10. Place small magnetic stirring bar in centrifuge bottle and  slowly
         add 100 ml water with stirring.
                                  00-03-2

-------
11. Transfer centrifuge bottle to constant temperature bath
    maintained at 80°C.
12. If yellow color 1s evident, add ascorbic acid  in 50-mg increments
    until Fe   color is gone.
13. Prepare copper disc by cleaning bare  side with copper cleaner and
    dipping disc in 12M HC1.
14. Suspend disc, using glass  rod, into centrifuge bottle, keeping
    disc under surface of liquid.
15. Maintain sample at bath temperature of 80°C for four hours.
16. Remove disc, rinse with water and air dry.
17. Mount on 32 mm planchet with double stick tape for radioassay.
                            00-03-3

-------
                                 Appendix

Preparation of Bismuth-207 Standard Solution
     Bismuth-207 decays by electron capture to lead-207m, which emits a
gamma ray at 570 keV.
                                            207
     1.  Evaporate a measured aliquot of the    B1 standard solution on
         a copper disc.
     2.  Radioassay the disc with a Ge(Li) detector for 1,000 minutes and
         record the net counts appearing under the 570 keV peak.
     3.  Radioassay the disc for beta activity using a beta counter having
                            2
         a window of 7 rag/cm  thickness.  This assay determines the
         contribution to the beta background from the bismuth-207 added to
         the sample.

Calculations
     Calculate the concentration, Z, of lead-210, bismuth-210 in
picocuries per sample as follows:

                     Z = Cl - CCB * 
-------
     Calculate the concentration,  Z,  of polom'um-210  In  picocurles per
unit sample as follows:
                                     x F  e ~xt
                            (2.22 (B-BjMEMVMT)

where

     A     =  gross sample counts which  appear  In  the polom'um-210 alpha
              energy region,
     A     =  background counts In the same  alpha  energy region as /t above,
     B     =  gross tracer counts which  appear  1n  the alpha energy region
              of the tracer Isotope,
     B.    =  background counts In the same  alpha  energy region as § above,
     E     =  alpha detector efficiency,
     F     =  total calibrated tracer counts for same counting time as
              sample counts,
     x     =  decay constant for polom'um-210,  days' ,
     t     =  time from separation to counting  In  days,
     V     =  sample unit (liters or  grams),
     T     =  counting time (minutes), and
     2.22  =  dpm per pCI.

     Calculate the lower limit of detection  (LLD)  for bismuth or polonium
In picocurles per unit sample as follows:
                      LLD
                               4.66V
                            (2.22)(E)(R)(V)(T)
where

     CD    =  background count rate,


                                 00-03-5

-------
     T     =  counting time (same for  sample and background),
     E     =  alpha detector efficiency,
     R     =  fractional yield based on B-B-i/F In calculation, for Po
                      210
              (see R,    B1 calculation for B1),
     V     =  sample unit  (liters or grams), and
     2.22  =  dpm per pCI.

     This LLD calculation  is valid if  the  sample counting time is equal to
the background counting time.
Notes
1.  Teflon Is a registered tradmark of the DuPont Co., Wilmington, DE.

References
1.  Blanchard, R. L., "Rapid Determination of Lead-210 and Polonium-210 in
    Environmental Samples by Deposition on Nickel," Analytical  Chemistry,
    38, 189 (1966).
                                  00-03-6

-------
            RADIOCHEMICAL DETERMINATION OF PLUTONIUM,  THORIUM
                        AND URANIUM IN AIR FILTERS

Principle
     The cellulose air filters are ashed at 550°C for  48 hours.
Plutonium-242, thorium-234, and uranium-232 tracers are added to determine
chemical yield.  Silica is volatilized with HF and the residue is
solubilized.  Plutonium and uranium are extracted into triisooctylamine
(TIOA).  The thorium is purified by adsorption on anion exchange resin
from nitric acid.  Plutonium and uranium are stripped  from the TIOA with
dilute nitric acid and selectively coprecipitated with 0.1 mg lanthanum as
fluoride.  The precipitates are filtered on filter membranes and
radioassayed by alpha spectroscopy for plutonium and uranium.

Special Apparatus
     1.  Nuclepore filter membranes,  25 mm dia., 0.2 micrometer pore size
         or equivalent.  See Note 1.
     2.  Ion exchange column, 2 cm I.D. x 10 cm.
     3.  Plastic graduated cylinder,  100 ml volume.
     4.  Planchets, stainless steel,  32 mm diameter.
     5.  Separatory funnels, 1 liter capacity.
     6.  Suction filter for 25 mm membrane.
     7.  Teflon beakers.  See Note 2.
     8.  Glassware.
     9.  Alpha spectrometric system consisting of multichannel analyzer,
         biasing electronics, printer, silicon surface barrier detectors,
         vacuum pump and chamber.

Reagents
     1.  Anion exchange resin; BioRad AG1X8 (200-400 mesh, nitrate form)
         or equivalent.  Convert to nitrate form for thorium analysis by
         washing the resin with 6J1 HNOg until the washing shows no trace
                                 00-04-1

-------
    of chloride, when tested with AgNO-j.
2.  Ascorbic acid, crystalline reagent.
3.  Ethanol, 95 percent reagent.
4.  Hydrochloric acid, 12M.  37 percent HC1  reagent.
5.  Hydrochloric acid, 9f1.  Dilute 750 ml  of the 37 percent reagent
    grade HC1 to 1 liter with distilled water.
6.  Hydrochloric acid, 1M.  Dilute 83 ml  of  the 37 percent reagent
    grade HC1 to 1 liter with distilled water.
7.  Hydrofluoric acid, 29M, 48 percent HF reagent.
8.  Hydrofluoric acid, 3M,.  Dilute 104 ml of the 48  percent reagent
    grade HF to 1 liter with distilled water.  Use a  plastic graduate
    and storage bottle.
9.  Hydrogen peroxide, 50 percent reagent grade.
10. Lanthanum carrier, 0.1 mg La* /ml.  Dissolve 0.0779 g
    La(N03)3« 6H20 per 250 ml 1M HC1.
11. Nickel foil, 15 cm x 1 cm x 0.1 mm.
12. Nitric acid, 16M, 70 percent HN03 reagent.
13. Nitric acid, 6M.  Dilute 375 ml of the 70 percent reagent  grade
    HN03 to 1 liter with distilled water.
14. Nitric acid, O.M.  Dilute 6 ml of the 70 percent reagent  grade
    HN03 to 1 liter with distilled water.
15. Perchloric acid, 12M, 70 percent HC104 reagent.
16. Silver nitrate, crystalline reagent.
17. Silver nitrate, O.M.  Dissolve 1.7 g AgN03 reagent in
    distilled water.  Add 1 ml 6M HN03 and dilute to  100 ml with
    distilled water.
18. Titanium trichloride, 20 percent reagent grade.
19. Titanium trichloride, 0.4 percent.  Dilute 1 ml of the 20  percent
    T1C13 to 50 ml with 1 Q HC1.   Prepare fresh daily.
20. Triisooctylamine (TIOA), reagent grade.
21. TIOA solution in p-xylene, 10 percent.  Dissolve  100 ml of
    trilsooctylamine in p-xylene and dilute  to 1 liter with p-xylene.
                             00-04-2

-------
     22. p-Xylene, reagent grade.
     23. Thorium-234 tracer solution,  approximately 800 pCi/ml,  accurately
         calibrated.
     24. Uranium-232 tracer solution,  approximately 1 pC1/ml,  accurately
         calibrated.
     25. PIutonium-242 tracer solution, approximately 1 pCi/ml,  accurately
         calibrated.

Sample Preparation
     1.  Place air filter samples in a ceramic dish for ashing.
     2.  Ash in muffle furnace, gradually raising temperature  over several
         hours to 550°C.  Maintain temperature for 48 hours.
     3.  Carefully weigh cooled ash and transfer to Teflon beaker.  Add 1
         ml each of 242Pu, 234Th, and 232U tracers.
     4.  Add 20 ml of 29^1 HF and evaporate to dry ness to remove  SiF^.
         Repeat.
     5.  Dissolve the residue in 200 ml 9{4 HC1 and transfer solution to a
         separator/ funnel.
     6.  Wash beaker with 25 ml 9M^HC1 and add solution to separator/
         funnel.
     7.  Add 2 ml of 50 percent H202,  heat gently and set aside  for 10
         minutes.  See Note 3.

Plutonium Determination
     1.  Place 100 ml of 10 percent TIOA solution in a 1 liter separator/
         funnel.  Add 50 ml 9M HC1 and shake funnel for one minute.  Drain
         and discard lower aqueous acid phase after clean separation of
         the two phases.
     2.  Add the aqueous sample to the TIOA in the separator/  funnel and
         shake the funnel vigorously for two minutes.  Vent the  funnel '
         stopcock to prevent pressure buildup in the funnel.
                                 00-04-3

-------
3.  Allow the phases to separate cleanly and draw off  the  lower
    aqueous acid phase.  Save acid phase for thorium determination.
4.  Add 50 ml 9^1 HC1 to the TIOA solution 1n the separatory  funnel
    and shake for one minute.
5.  Allow the phases to separate; withdraw and discard lower aqueous
    acid phase.
6.  Repeat steps 4 and 5.
7.  Strip the plutonium from the TIOA solution by adding 100 ml  0.1M
    HN03 to the separatory funnel and shaking the funnel for two
    minutes.
8.  Allow phases to separate; withdraw and transfer lower  acid phase
    to separatory funnel.
9.  Repeat steps 7 and 8 and combine strip solutions.   Discard TIOA.
10. Place combined strip solutions in a separatory funnel.
11. Add 100 ml p-xylene to combined strip solution and shake funnel
    for one minute.  See Note 4.
12. Allow phases to separate cleanly; withdraw lower aqueous acid
    layer into beaker.  Discard p-xylene.
13. Evaporate combined solution from step 12 to dryness.  Do not
    overheat.
14. Add 10 ml 16M HN03 to residue and evaporate to dryness.   Do  not
    overheat.
15. Add 5 ml 9h1 HC1 and 5 ml 12M HCIO^ to residue and  evaporate  to
    dryness.
16. Repeat step 15.
17. Add 10 ml 12M HC1 and evaporate to dryness.
18. Repeat step 17.
19. Add 50 ml 1M HC1 to sample residue and warm gently to  dissolve
    residue.
 •
20. Heat sample solution to 80°C with stirring and add 50  mg ascorbic
    acid.  Do not overheat.
                             00-04-4

-------
     21.  Suspend clean nickel  metal  strip into  solution  for two  hours  to
         remove polonium.
     22.  Remove nickel and evaporate the solution to dryness.
     23.  Add 15 ml  1M_ HC1 to sample  residue and warm to  approximately  50°C,
     24.  Add 0.5 ml  50 percent HgOg, 1 ml of lanthanum carrier and  5
         ml  of 3M HF to precipitate  LaF-j.  Mix  well  and  set aside for  30
         minutes.
     25.  Using suction, filter coprecipitated sample through a filter
         membrane.   Save filtrate for uranium analyses.
     26.  Rinse sample beaker with 10 ml water and add to filter  funnel.
         Rinse beaker with 10 ml  ethanol and add to  funnel.
     27.  Remove clamp and top of funnel with suction on.  Allow  membrane
         to  dry.
     28.  Mount membrane carefully on 32 mm planchet  using double stick
         tape.
     29.  Count sample for 1000 minutes on alpha spectrometer.

Uranium Determination
     1.  Evaporate filtrate from step 25 of.the plutonium determination.
     2.  Add 10.ml  12M HC1 to residue and evaporate  to dryness.  Repeat
         this step.
     3.  Add 15 ml  1M_ HC1 to sample  residue and warm to  approximately  50°
         C.
     4.  Add enough  ascorbic acid to reduce iron in  the  sample,  indicated
         by  the disappearance of yellow color.
     5.  Add 1 ml of 0.4 percent T1C13 to reduce uranium.
     6.  Add 1 ml of lanthanum carrier and 5 ml of 3 M HF.  Mix  well  and
         set aside for 30 minutes.
     7.  Using suction, filter coprecipitated sample through a filter
         membrane.
     8.  Rinse sample beaker with 10 ml water and add to filter  funnel.
         Rinse beaker with 10 ml ethanol and add to funnel.
                                  00-04-5

-------
     9.  Remove clamp and top of funnel  with suction on.   Allow membrane
         to dry.
     10. Mount membrane carefully on 32 mm planchet using  double  stick
         tape.
     11. Count sample for 1000 minutes on alpha spectrometer.

Thorium Determination
     1.  Evaporate aqueous acid fraction containing thorium from  step 3 of
         Plutonium determination.
     2.  Add 10 ml 16M HN03 and evaporate to dryness.
     3.  Add 5 ml 9M_ HC1 and 5 ml 12M HC104 and evaporate  to dryness.
     4.  Add 10 ml of 16M_ HNOj and evaporate to dryness.
     5.  Repeat step 4.
     6.  Dissolve sample In 10 ml of 6M_ HNOj with heat.
     7.  Prepare Ion exchange column with 25 ml BloRad AG1X8 resin.  Wash
         resin with 250 ml of 6M HN03.
     8.  Decant sample Into column at gravity flow (approx. 3ml/m1n) and
         rinse the sample on the column with an additional 50 ml  of 6M_
         HN03.  Discard wash.
     9.  Elute the thorium from the column with 200 ml of  6M HC1  at flow
         rate of 3 ml/minute.
     10. Evaporate thorium eluate to dryness.
     11. Wet ash residue with 10 ml 12M HC1 and evaporate  to dryness.
     12. Add 15 ml 1M_ HC1 to sample residue and warm to approximately  50°C.
     13. Add 1 ml lanthanum carrier and 5 ml of 3M_ HF to precipitate
         LaF3.  Mix well and set aside for 30 minutes.
     14. Using suction, filter coprecipitated sample through a filter
         membrane.
     15. Rinse sample beaker with 10 ml  water and add to filter funnel.
         Rinse beaker with 10 ml ethanol and add to funnel.
     16. Remove clamp and top of funnel  with suction on.   Allow membrane
         to dry.
                                  00-04-6

-------
    17. Mount membrane carefully on 32 mm planchet using  double  stick tape.
    18. Beta count the sample to measure thorium-234 recovery.
    19. Count sample for 1000 minutes on alpha  spectrometer.

Calculations
    Calculate the concentration, Z, of plutom'um in picocuries per cubic
meter as follows:
                                       x F
                          (2.22)(B-B1)(E)(V)(T)
where
     A     =  gross sample counts which appear in the  plutonium-238 or
              plutonium-239 alpha energy region,
     A.    =  background counts in the same alpha energy  region  as £  above,
     B     =  gross tracer counts which appear in the  alpha  energy region
              of the tracer isotope,
     BI    =  background counts in the same alpha energy  region  as £  above,
     E     =  alpha detector efficiency,
     F     =  total calibrated tracer counts for  same  counting time as
              sample counts,
     V     =  sample volume (cubic meters of air),
     T     =  counting time (minutes), and
     2.22  =  dpm per pCi.

     Calculate the concentration, Z, of uranium in picocuries per cubic
meter as follows:

                      z =       (A-Aj) x F
                          (2.22)(B-B1)(E)(V)(T)
                                 00-04-7

-------
where
     A     =  gross sample counts which  appear  in the uranium-234,-235,
              or-238 alpha energy region,
     Aj    =  background counts In the same alpha energy region as A above,
     B      = gross tracer counts which  appear  in the alpha energy region
              of the tracer isotope,
     B^    =  background counts in the same alpha energy region as B_ above.
     E     =  alpha detector efficiency,
     F     =  total calibrated tracer counts  for same counting time as
              sample counts,
     V     =  sample volume (cubic meters  of  air),
     T     =  counting time (minutes), and
     2.22  =  dpm per pd.

     Calculate the concentration, Z,  of  thorium in picocuries per cubic
meter as follows:

                      z m      (A - AJ)  x  F
                          (2.22HB - BjMEMVHT)
where
     A     =  gross sample counts which  appear  in the thorium -227, -228,
              -230 or -232 alpha energy  region,
     A.     =  background counts In the same alpha energy region as A^ above,
     B     =  gross tracer beta counts,
     Bj     =  beta counter background,
     E     =  alpha detector efficiency,
     F     =  total calibrated tracer beta counts,
     V     =  sample volume (cubic meters of air),
     T     =  counting time (minutes), a* d
     2.22  =  dpm per pd.

                                  00-04-8

-------
     Calculate the lower limit of detection (LID)  in picocuries  per cubic
meter as follows:
                      LLD =     4'66
                            (2.22)(E)(R)(V)(T)

where

     CB    =  background count rate,
     T     =  counting time (same for sample and background),
     E     =  alpha detector efficiency,
     R     =  fractional yield based on B-Bj/F  in calculation,
     V     =  sample volume (cubic meters of air), and
     2.22  =  dpm per pCi.

     This LLD calculation is valid if the sample counting  time  is  equal  to
the background counting time.
Notes
1.  Nuclepore is a registered trademark of Nuclepore Corp.,  Pleasanton,  CA.
2.  Teflon is a registered trademark of Dupont Co.,  Wilmington,  DE.
3.  Hydrogen peroxide stabilizes the +4 plutonium valence necessary  for
    maximum extraction into the TIOA.
4.  The p-xylene removes most of the TIOA carried into the aqueous acid
    phase.  Residual TIOA makes the coprecipitation  step more difficult.

References
1.  Moore, F.L., "Liquid-Liquid Extraction of Uranium and Plutonium  from
    Hydrochloric Acid Solution with Tri(iso-octy1)amine," Analytical
    Chemistry 30, 908 (1958).
                                  00-04-9

-------
2.  Volchok, H. L. and dePlanque, G., editors,  EML  Procedures Manual,  25th
    Ed., Environmental Measurement Laboratory,  U.S.  Department  of  Energy,
    New York.
3.  Johns, F.B., et al., Radlochemcal  Analytical Procedures for Analysis
    of Environmental Samples, EMSL-LV-0539-17,  U.S.  E.P.A., Las Vegas,  NV.
                                 00-04-10

-------
        RADIOCHEMICAL DETERMINATION OF THORIUM AND URANIUM IN ASHED
     SAMPLES  INCLUDING SOIL, COAL, FLY ASH, ORES. VEGETATION AND BIOTA

                              Fusion Method

Principle
    The sample is ashed at 550 °C for 72  hours.   Thorium-234  and
uranium-232 tracers are added to a weighed aliquot.   Silica  is  volatilized
and the sample is fused with potassium fluoride and  potassium
pyrosulfate.   The uranium is extracted into triisooctylamine (TIOA).   The
thorium is purified by adsorption on anion exchange  resin from  nitric
acid.  Uranium is stripped from  the resin with  HC1 and coprecipitated.
Each actinide isotope is radioassayed by alpha  spectroscopy.

Special Apparatus
    1.     Nuclepore filter membranes, 25 mm dia., 0.2 micrometer  pore
           size or equivalent.  See Note 1.
    2.     Ion exchange column,  2 cm I.D. x 10  cm.
    3.     Plastic graduated cylinder, 100 ml capacity.
    4.     Planchets, stainless  steel, 32 mm diameter.
    5.     Separatory funnels, 1 liter capacity.
    6.     -Suction filter for 25 mm membrane.
    7.     Teflon beakers.  See  Mote 2.
    8.     Glassware.
    9.     Platinum Crucible.
    10.    Alpha spectrometric system consisting of  multichannel  analyzer,
           biasing electronics,  printer, silicon surface barrier  detector,
           vacuum pump and chamber.
    11,    Meker burner.

Reagents
    1.     Anion exchange resin; BioRad  AG1X8 (200-400 mesh, nitrate form)
                                 00-05-1

-------
    or equivalent.  Convert to nitrate form for thorium analysis by
    washing the resin with 6M HN03 until  the washing shows no trace
    of chloride, when tested with AgNO-j.
2.  Ascorbic acid, crystalline reagent.
3.  Hydrochloric acid, 12M.  37 percent HC1 reagent.
4.  Hydrochloric acid, 9M.  Dilute 750 ml  of the 37 percent reagent
    grade HC1 to 1 liter with distilled water.
5.  Hydrochloric acid, 1M.  Dilute 83 ml  of the 37 percent reagent
    grade HC1 to 1 liter with distilled water.
6.  Hydrofluoric acid, 29M, 48 percent HF reagent.
7.  Hydrofluoric acid, 3M,.  Dilute 104 ml of the 48 percent reagent
    grade HF to 1 liter with distilled water.  Use a plastic graduate
    and storage bottle.
8.  Lanthanum carrier, 0.1 mg La  /ml.  Dissolve 0.0779 g
    La(N03)3* 6H20 per 250 ml 1M HC1.
9.  Nickel foil, 15 cm x 1 cm x 0.1 mm.
10. Nitric acid, 16M, 70 percent HN03 reagent.
11. Nitric acid, 6M.  Dilute 375 ml of the 70 percent reagent grade
    HN03 to 1 liter with distilled water.
12. Nitric acid, 0.1M.  Dilute 6 ml of the 70 percent reagent grade
    HN03 to 1 liter with distilled water.
13. Perchloric acid, 12M, 70 percent HC104 reagent.
14. Potassium fluoride, crystalline reagent.
15. Potassium pyrosulfate, crystalline reagent.
16. Silver nitrate, crystalline reagent.
17. Silver nitrate, O.IM^  Dissolve 1.7 g  AgN03 reagent in
    distilled water.  Add 1 ml 6M HN03 and dilute to 100 ml  with
    distilled water.  Keep in brown bottle.
18. Sulfuric acid, 3M.  Dilute 167 ml of the 96 percent H2S04
    reagent to 1 liter with distilled water.
19. Titanium trichloride, 20 percent reagent grade.
                            00-05-2

-------
     20. Titanium trichloride,  0.4 percent.   Dilute 1 ml  of  the  20  percent
         T1C13 to 50 ml  with 1  M HC1.   Prepare fresh daily.
     21. Triisooctylamine (TIOA), reagent grade.
     22. TIOA solution in p-xylene, 10 percent.   Dissolve 100 ml  of
         triisooctylamine in p-xylene  and dilute  to 1 liter  with p-xylene.
     23. p-Xylene, reagent grade.
     24. Thorium-234 tracer solution,  approximately 800  pCi/ml,  accurately
         calibrated.
     25. Uranium-232 tracer solution,  approximately 1 pCi/ml, accurately
         calibrated.

Sample Preparation
     1.  Place 100 g sample in  ceramic dish  for ashing.
     2.  Ash in muffle furnace, gradually raising temperature over  several
         hours to 550°C.  Maintain at  temperature for 72 hours.
     3.  Carefully weigh 1 g aliquot of cooled ash and transfer  to  Teflon
         beaker.  Add 1  ml each of 234Th and 232U tracers.
     4.  Wet ash with two additions of 20 ml each 29M HF and evaporate
         each time to dry ness.
     5.  Transfer the residue to a platinum  crucible with the aid of a
         spatula.  Use a 20 ml  crucible for  a 1 g sample.
     6.  Add 2g of KF for a Ig  sample  or 4g  KF for a 5g  sample and  fuse
         covered over a  Meker burner for 30  minutes.
     7.  Add 7.5 grams KgSgOy for a 5-gram sample or 3 grams for a
         1-gram sample and continue fusing for 30 minutes.
     8.  Cool the crucible in an ice bath, add 15 ml 12M HC1 and evaporate.
     9.  Add 15 ml of water and partially evaporate to 10 ml volume.
     10. Transfer to 1000-ml beaker and add  150 ml  water.
     11. Heat and evaporate to  dry ness and add 200 ml 3^1 f^SO^.
         Evaporate past  white fumes to dryness.
     12. Dissolve the residue in 200 ml 9M HC1.
                                 00-05-3

-------
Uranium Determination
     1.  Place 100 ml of 10 percent TIOA solution In a  1  liter  separator/
         funnel.  Add 50 ml 9f1 HC1 and shake  funnel  for 1 minute.   Drain
         and discard lower aqueous acid phase after  clean separation  of
         the two phases.
     2.  Add the aqueous sample from step 12  above,  to  the TIOA In  the
         separator/ funnel and shake the funnel  vigorously for  two
         minutes.  Vent the funnel stopcock to prevent  pressure buildup In
         the funnel.
     3.  Allow the phases to separate cleanly and draw  off the  lower
         aqueous acid phase.  Save for thorium analysis.
     4.  Add 50 ml 9J1 HC1 to the TIOA solution In the separatory funnel
         and shake for 1 minute.
     5.  Allow the phases to separate; withdraw and  discard  lower aqueous
         acid phase.
     6.  Repeat steps 4 and 5.
     7.  Strip the uranium from the TIOA solution by adding  100 ml  0.1 M
         H,M03 to the separatory funnel and shaking the  funnel  for 2
         minutes.
     8.  Allow phases to separate; withdraw and save lower acid phase,
         discard organic phase.
     9.  Repeat steps 7 and 8 and combine strip solutions.
     10. Place combined strip solutions In the clean separatory funnel.
     11. Add 100 ml p-xylene to combined strip solution and  shake funnel
         for 1 minute.  See Note 3.
     12. Allow phases to separate cleanly; withdraw lower aqueous acid
         layer Into beaker.
     13. Evaporate combined solution from step 12 to dryness.   Discard
         organic phase.  Do not overheat.
     14. Add 100 ml 16f1 HNOj to residue and evaporate to dryness.  Do
         not overheat.
                                  00-05-4

-------
     15. Add 5 ml  9M HC1  and 5 ml  12M HC104 to residue and evaporate  to
         dry ness.
     16. Repeat step 15.
     17. Add 10 ml 12M HC1  and evaporate to dryness.
     18. Repeat step 17.
     19. Add 50 ml 1M HC1  to sample residue and warm  gently to dissolve
         residue.
     20. Heat sample solution to 80°C with stirring and add 50 mg ascorbic
         acid.  Do not overheat.
     21. Suspend clean nickel metal strip into solution for two hours to
         remove polonium.
     22. Remove nickel and evaporate solution to dryness.
     23. Add 15 ml 1M_ HC1  to sample residue and warm  to approximately 50°C.
     24. Add enough ascorbic acid to reduce iron in the sample, Indicated
         by the disappearance of yellow color.
     25. Add 1 ml  of 0.4 percent TiClj to reduce uranium.
     26. Add 1 ml  of lanthanum carrier and 5 ml of 3M_ HF.   Mix well and
         set aside for 30 minutes.
     27. Using suction, filter coprecipitated sample  through a filter
         membrane.
     28. Rinse sample beaker with 10 ml water and add to filter funnel.
         Rinse beaker with 10 ml ethanol and add to funnel.
     29. Remove clamp and top of funnel with suction  on.  Allow membrane
         to dry.
     30. Mount membrane carefully on 32 mm planchet using  double stick
         tape.
     31. Count sample for 1000 minutes on alpha spectrometer.

Thorium Determination
     1.  Evaporate aqueous acid fraction containing thorium from step 3  of
         .Uranium Determination.
     2.  Add 10 ml 16M_ HNOj and evaporate to dryness.
                                 00-05-5

-------
    3.  Add 5 ml 9f1 HC1 and 5 ml 12M HC104 and evaporate  to  dryness.
    4.  Add 10 ml of 16M_ HM03 and evaporate to dryness.
    5.  Repeat step 4.
    6.  Dissolve sample In 10 ml of 6^ HN03 with  heat.
    7.  Prepare ion exchange column with 25 ml  BioRad AG1X8  resin.  Wash
        resin with 250 ml  of 6M HN03.
    8.  Decant sample into column at gravity flow (approx. 3ml/min) and
        rinse the sample on the column with an additional  50 ml  of 6M^
        HN03.  Discard wash.
    9.  Elute the thorium from the column with 200 ml of  6M  HC1  at flow
        rate of 3 ml/minute.
    10. Evaporate thorium eluate to dryness.
    11. Add 10 ml 12M HC1  to residue and evaporate to dryness.
    12. Add 15 ml 1M_ HC1 to sample residue and warm to  approximately  50°C.
    13. Add 1 ml lanthanum carrier and 5 ml of 3M HF.  Mix well  and set
        aside for 30 minutes.
    14. Using suction, filter coprecipitated sample through  a filter
        membrane.
    15. Rinse sample beaker with 10 ml water and  add to filter  funnel.
        Rinse beaker with 10 ml ethanol and add to funnel.
    16. Remove clamp and top of funnel with suction on.   Allow  membrane  to
        dry.
    17. Mount membrane carefully on 32 mm planchet using  double stick tape.
    18. Beta count the sample to measure thorium-234 recovery*
    19. Count sample for 1000 minutes on alpha spectrometer.

Calculations
    Calculate the concentration, Z, of uranium in picocuries per gram as
follows:

                                (A-A) x F
                          (2.22)(B-B1)(E)(W)(T)
                                  00-05-6

-------
where
     A     =  gross sample counts which  appear in the  uram'um-234,-235,
              or-238 alpha energy region,
     Aj    =  background counts in the same  alpha energy  region as A above,
     B     =  gross tracer counts which  appear in the  alpha energy region
              of the tracer isotope,
     B^    =  background counts in the same  alpha energy  region as jJ above,
     E     =  alpha detector efficiency,
     F     =  total calibrated tracer counts for same  counting time as
              sample counts,
     W     =  sample weight (grams),
     T     =  counting time (minutes), and
     2.22  =  dpm per pCi.

     Calculate the concentration,  Z,  of  thorium 1n picocuries per gram as
fol1ows:

                     Zm       (A - A1)  x F
                         (2.22HB  -  BjHEHHHT)
where
     A     =  gross sample counts  which  appear  in the thorium -227, -228,
              -230 or -232 alpha energy  region,
     A.     =  background counts in the same alpha energy region as A above,
     B     =  gross tracer beta counts,
     BI     =  beta counter background,
     E     =  alpha detector efficiency,
     F     =  total calibrated tracer beta counts,
     W     =  sample weight (grams),
     T     =  counting time (minutes), and
     2.22  =  dpm per pC1.

                                 00-05-7

-------
     Calculate the lower limit of detection  (LLD)  for  uranium or thorium
in picocuries per gram as follows:

                                4.66 V CRT
                      LLD
                            (2.22)(E)(R)(W)(T)
where

     CB    =  background count rate,
     T      = counting time;  same for sample and  background,
     E      = alpha detector efficiency,
     R      = fractional yi Id based  on B-Bj/F  in calculation,
     W      = sample weight (grams),  and
     2.22  =  dpm per pCi.

     This LLD calculation is valid if the sample  counting  time  is  the  same
as the background counting time.
Notes
1.  Nuclepore is a registered trademark of Nuclepore Corp.,  Pleasanton,  CA.
2.  Teflon is a registered trademark of Dupont, Co., Wilmington,  DE.
3.  The p-xylene removes most of the TIOA carried into the aqueous  acid
    phase.  Residual TIOA makes the coprecipitation step more  difficult.

References
1.  Moore, F.L., "Liquid-Liquid Extraction of Uranium and Plutonium from
    Hydrochloric acid Solution with Tri (iso-octyl) amine,"  Analytical
    Chemistry 30, 908 (1958).
2.  Volchok, H. L. and dePlanque, G., editors, EML Procedures  Manual.  25th
    Ed., Environmental Measurement Laboratory, U.S. Department of Energy,
    New York.
3.  Johns, F.B., et al., Radiochemical Analytical Procedures for  Analysis
    of Environmental Samples, EMSL-LV-0539-17, U.S. E.P.A.,  Las Vegas,  NV,
    (1979).

                                  00-05-8

-------
    RADIOCHEMICAL  DETERMINATION OF THORIUM AND URANIUM  IN ASHED SAMPLES

                             Nonfusion Method

Principle
    The sample Is ashed at 550°C  for 72 hours.   Thorlum-234 and
uran1um-232 tracers are added to  1  g allquots.   Silica  Is volatilized with
HF and the residue 1s solublllzed.   The uranium Is extracted Into
trllsooctylamlne (TIOA), stripped from the TIOA with nitric acid  and
coprecipitated.  The thorium Is purified by adsorption  on anlon exchange
resin from nitric acid, stripped  from the resin with HC1  and
coprecipitated.  Each Isotope Is  radloassayed by alpha  spectroscopy.

Special Apparatus
    1.  Nuclepore filter membranes,  25 mm dia., 0.2 micrometer pore size
        or equivalent.  See Note  1.
    2.  Ion exchange column, 2 cm Internal  diameter x 10  cm.
    3.  Plastic graduated cylinder.
                                         *•
    4.  Planchets, stainless Steel,  32 nrnf.diameter.
    5.  Separatory funnels, 1 liter capacity.
    6.  Suction filter for 25 mm membrane.
    7.  Teflon beakers.  See Note 2.
    8.  Glassware.
    9.  Alpha spectrometrlc system consisting of multichannel analyzer,
        biasing electronics, printer, silicon surface barrier detectors,
        vacuum pump and chamber.

Reagents
    1.  Anlon exchange resin; BloRad AG1X8 (200-400 mesh, nitrate form)  or
        equivalent.  Convert to nitrate form for thorium  analysis by
        washing the resin with 6M_ HN03 until the washing  shows no trace
        of chloride when tested with AgN03.
                                  00-06-1

-------
2.  Ascorbic acid, crystalline reagent.
3.  Hydrochloric acid, 12M.  37 percent  HC1 reagent.
4.  Hydrochloric add, 9M.  Dilute 750 ml of  the  37 percent reagent
    grade HC1 to 1 liter with distilled  water.
5.  Hydrochloric acid, 1M.  Dilute 83 ml of the 37 percent reagent
    grade HC1 to 1 liter with distilled  water.
6.  Hydrofluoric add, 29M, 48 percent HF reagent.
7.  Hydrofluoric acid, 3M^  Dilute 104 ml of  the  48 percent reagent
    grade HF to 1 liter with distilled water.  Use a plastic
    graduated cylinder and storage bottle.
8.  Lanthanum carrier, 0.1 mg La*3/ml.  Dissolve  0.0779  g
    La(N03)3* 6H20 per 250 ml 1M HC1.
9.  Nickel foil, 15 cm x 1 cm x 0.1 mm.
10. Nitric acid, 16^, 70 percent HN03 reagent.
11. Nitric acid, 6M.  Dilute 375 ml of the  70 percent  reagent  grade
    HH03 to 1 liter with distilled water.
12. Nitric acid, 0.1^.  Dilute 6 ml of the  70 percent  reagent  grade
    HN03 to 1 liter with distilled water.
13. Perchloric acid, 12M, 70 percent HC104  reagent.
14. Silver nitrate, crystalline reagent.
15. Silver nitrate, O.W.  Dissolve 1.7  g AgN03  reagent  in
    distilled water.  Add 1 ml 6M HN03 and  dilute to  100 ml with
    distilled water.
16. Titanium trichloride, 20 percent reagent  grade.
17. Titanium trichloride, 0.4 percent.  Dilute 1  ml of the 20  percent
    TiCl3 to 50 ml with 1 M HC1.  Prepare fresh  dally.
18. Triisooctylamine (TIOA), reagent grade.
19. TIOA solution in p-xylene, 10 percent.  Dissolve  100 ml of
    triisooctylamine 1n p-xylene and dilute to 1  liter with p-xylene.
20. p-Xylene, reagent grade.
21. Thorium-234 tracer solution, approximately 800  pC1/ml, accurately
    calibrated.
                             00-06-2

-------
     22. Uranium-232 tracer solution,  approximately 1  pCI/ml,  accurately
         calibrated.

Sample Preparation
     1.  Place lOOg sample in ceramic  dish for ashing.
     2.  Ash in muffle furnace, gradually raising temperature  over  several
         hours to 550°C.   Maintain temperature for 72  hours.
     3.  Carefully weigh  Ig aliquot of cooled ash and  transfer to Teflon
         beaker.  Add 1 ml each of 234Th and 232U tracers.
     4.  Treat sample with two additions of 20 ml each 29M  HF  and
         evaporate each time to dryness.

Uranium Determination
     1.  Add 5 ml of 12M  HC104 and 5 ml  of 9M HC1 to sample and
         evaporate to dryness.  Repeat this step.
     2.  Add 10 ml of 12M HC1 and transfer sample to glass  beaker.
         Evaporate to dryness and repeat this step.
     3.  Dissolve sample  in 300 ml of  9M^ HC1 and warm  to approximately
         50*C.
     4.  Place 100 ml of  10 percent TIOA solution in a 1 liter separatory
         funnel.  Add 50  ml 9M HC1 and shake funnel for 1 minute.   Drain
         and discard lower aqueous acid phase after clean separation of
         the two phases.
     5.  Add the aqueous  sample to the TIOA 1n the separatory  funnel and
         shake the funnel vigorously for two minutes.   Vent the funnel
         stopcock to prevent pressure  buildup in the funnel.
     6.  Allow the phases to separate  cleanly and draw off  the lower
         aqueous acid phase.  Save for thorium analysis.
     7.  Add 50 ml 9M HC1 to the TIOA  solution in the  separatory funnel
         and shake for one minute.
     8.  Allow the phases to separate; withdraw and discard lower aqueous
         acid phase.
                                 00-06-3

-------
9.  Repeat steps 7 and 8.
10. Strip the uranium from the TIOA solution by adding 100 ml  0.1  *1
    HN03 to the separatory funnel and shaking the funnel  for two
    minutes.
11. Allow phases to separate; withdraw and save lower acid phase.
12. Repeat steps 10 and 11 and combine strip solutions.
13. Place combined strip solutions in clean separatory funnel.
14. Add 100 ml p-xylene to combined strip solution and shake funnel
    for 1 minute.  See Note 3.
15. Allow phases to separate cleanly; withdraw lower aqueous acid
    layer into beaker.  Discard p-xylene.
16. Evaporate solution from step 15 to dryness.  Do not overheat.
17. Add 100 ml 16M^ HN03 to residue and evaporate to dryness.  Do
    not overheat.
18. Add 5 ml 9M HC1 and 5ml 1234 HC104 to residue and evaporate to
    dryness.
19. Repeat step 18.
20. Add 10 ml 12M HC1 and evaporate to dryness.
21. Repeat step 20.
22. Add 50 ml 1M_ HC1 to sample residue and warm gently to dissolve
    residue.
23. Heat sample solution to 80°C with stirring and add 50 mg ascorbic
    acid.  Do not overheat.
24. Suspend clean nickel metal strip into solution for two hours to
    remove polonium.
25. Remove nickel and evaporate solution to dryness.
26. Add 15 ml 1M_ HC1 to sample residue and warm to approximately 50°C.
27. Add enough ascorbic acid to reduce iron in the sample, indicated
    by the disappearance of yellow color.
28. Add 1. ml of 0.4 percent TiCl, to reduce uranium.
29. Add 1 ml of lanthanum carrier and 5 ml of 3 M HF.  Mix well and
    set aside for 30 minutes to precipitate LaF- carrying uranium.
                             00-06-4

-------
     30. Using suction,  filter copreclpltated sample  through a  filter
         membrane.
     31. Rinse sample beaker with  10  ml  water and add to filter funnel.
         Rinse beaker with 10 ml ethanol  and add to funnel.
     32. Remove clamp and top of funnel  with suction  on.   Allow membrane
         to dry.
     33. Mount membrane carefully  on  32  mm planchet using  double stick
         tape.
     34. Count sample for 1000 minutes on alpha spectrometer.

Thorium Determination
     1.  Evaporate aqueous acid fraction containing thorium  from step 6 of
         Uranium Determination.
     2.  Add 10 ml  16M HNOj and evaporate to dryness.
     3.  Add 5 ml 9M HC1 and 5 ml  12M HC104 and evaporate  to dryness.
     4.  Add 10 ml  of 16f1 HN03 and evaporate to dryness.
     5.  Repeat step 4.
     6.  Dissolve sample in 10 ml  of 6M_ HN03 with heat.
     7.  Prepare ion exchange column with 25 ml BloRad AG1X8 resin.  Wash
         resin with 250 ml of 6M HN03.
     8.  Decant sample into column at gravity flow (approx.  3ml/min) and
         rinse the sample on the column  with an additional 50 ml of  6M_
         HN03.  Discard wash.
     9.  Elute the thorium from the column with 200 ml of  6M HC1 at  flow
         rate of 3 ml/minute.
     10. Evaporate thorium eluate to dryness.
     11. Add 10 ml 12M HC1 to residue and evaporate to dryness.
     12. Add 15 ml 1M HC1 to sample residue and warm  to  approximately  50°C,
     13. Add 1 ml lanthanum carrier and  5 ml of 3M^ HF.  Mix well and set
         aside for 30 minutes to precipitate LaF3 carrying thorium.
     14. Using suction, filter coprecipitated sample  through a  filter
         membrane.
                                  00-06-5

-------
     15.   Rinse sample beaker with  10 ml water and add to filter funnel.
           Rinse beaker with 10 ml ethanol  and add to funnel.
     16.   Remove clamp and top of funnel with suction on.  Allow membrane
           to dry.
     17.   Mount membrane carefully  on 32 mm planchet using double stick
           tape.
     18.   Beta count the sample to  measure thorlum-234 recovery.
     19.   Count sample for 1000 minutes on alpha spectrometer.

Calculations
     Calculate the concentration, I, of uranium In picocurfes per gram as
follows:
where
                      Z =
(A-AX)  x  F
     A      = gross sample counts which appear 1n the  uranfum-234,-235,
              or-238 alpha energy region,
     A.    =  background counts In the same alpha energy  region as A above,
     B      = gross tracer counts which appear In the  alpha energy region
              of the tracer Isotope,
     B.    =  background counts In the same alpha energy  region as B_ above,
     E     =  alpha detector efficiency,
     F     =  total calibrated tracer counts for same  counting time as
              sample counts,
     W     =  sample weight (grams),
     T     =  counting time (minutes), and
     2.22  =  dpm per pCI.
                                  00-06-6

-------
     Calculate the concentration,  2,  of thorium in plcocuries per gram as
follows:
                          (A -
                                        x  F
                         (2.22HB -
where
E
F
W
T
2.22
              gross sample counts which  appear  in the thorium -227, -228,
              -230 or -232 alpha energy  region,
              background counts In the  same  alpha energy region as A above,
              gross tracer beta counts,
              beta counter background,
              alpha detector efficiency,
              total calibrated tracer beta counts,
              sample weight (grams),
              counting time (minutes), and
              dpm per pCi.
     Calculate the lower limit of detection  (LLD) of  uranium or thorium in
picocuries per gram as follows:
                      LLD
                            (2.22)(E)(R)(W)(T)
where
     A,    =  background counts in the  same  alpha energy region as A_ above,
     T     =  counting time;  same for sample and background,
     E     =  alpha detector  efficiency,
     R     =  fractional yi Id based on B-Bj/F  in calculation,
     W     =  sample weight  (grams), and
     2.22  =  dpm per pCi.
                                 00-06-7

-------
     This LLD calculation is valid if the sample counting  time  is  same as
the background counting time.
Notes
1.  Nuclepore is a registered trademark of Nuclepore  Corp., Pleasanton, CA.
2.  Teflon is a registered trademark of Dupont,  Co.,  Wilmington, DE.
3.  The p-xylene removes most of the TIOA carried into  the aqueous acid
    phase.  Residual  TIOA makes the coprecipitation step more difficult.

References
1.  Moore, F.L., "Liquid-Liquid Extraction of Uranium and Plutonium from
    Hydrochloric acid Solution with Tri (iso-octyl) amine," Analytical
    Chemistry 30. 908 (1958).
2.  Volchok, H. L. and dePlanque, G., editors,  EML Procedures Manual, 25th
    Ed., Environmental Measurement Laboratory,  U.S. Department  of Energy,
    New York.
3.  Johns, F.B., et al., Radiochemical Analytical Procedures for Analysis
    of Environmental  Samples, EMSL-LV-0539-17,  U.S. E.P.A., Las Vegas, NV,
    (1979).
                                 00-06-8

-------
        RADIOCHEMICAL  DETERMINATION OF THORIUM AND URANIUM IN WATER

Principle
    The water sample 1s filtered.  Thorlum-234 and  uranlum-232  tracers  are
added to 1 to 4 liter allquots.  After evaporation,  the uranium 1s
extracted Into tr11soocty1 amine (TIOA).   The thorium Is purified by
adsorption on anlon exchange resin from nitric acid.  Uranium Is stripped
from the TIOA with nitric acid and copred pita ted.   Thorium  Is  stripped
from the resin with HC1 and copred pita ted.   Each actlnide 1s radloassayed
by alpha spectroscopy.

Special Apparatus
    1.     Nuclepore filter membranes,  25 mm dia.,  0.2 micrometer pore
           size or equivalent.  See  Note 1.
    2.     Ion exchange column, 2 cm internal  diameter x 10  cm.
    3.     Plastic graduated cylinder,  100 ml  volume.
    4.     Planchets,  stainless steel,  32 mm diameter.
    5.     Separatory funnels, 1 liter capacity.
    6.     Suction filter for  25 mm membrane.
    7.     Teflon beakers.   See Note 2.
    8.     Glassware.
    9.     Pleated filter paper.
    10.    Alpha spectrometric system consisting  of multichannel  analyzer,
           biasing electronics, printer, silicon  surface barrier
           detectors,  vacuum pump and chamber.

Reagents
    1.     Anlon exchange resin; BioRad AG1X8 (200-400 mesh, nitrate form)
           or equivalent.  Convert to nitrate form  for thorium  analysis by
           washing the resin with 6f1 HN03 until the washing  shows no
           trace of chloride,  when tested with AgN03.
    2.     Ascorbic acid, crystalline reagent.
                                 00-07-1

-------
3.  Hydrochloric acid, 12M.  37 percent HC1  reagent.
4.  Hydrochloric acid, 9M.  Dilute 750 ml  of the 37 percent  reagent
    grade KC1 to 1 liter with distilled water.
5.  Hydrochloric acid, IN.  Dilute 83 ml of  the 37 percent reagent
    grade HC1 to 1 liter with distilled water.
6.  Hydrofluoric acid, 29M, 48 percent HF reagent.
7.  Hydrofluoric acid, 3M.  Dilute 104 ml  of the 48 percent  reagent
    grade HF to 1 liter with distilled water.  Use a  plastic
    graduated cylinder and storage bottle.
8.  Lanthanum carrier, 0.1 mg La*3/ml.  Dissolve 0.0779 g
    La(N03)3* 6H20 per 250 ml 1M HCl.
9.  Nickel foil, 15 cm x 1 cm x 0.1 mm.
10. Nitric acid, 16M, 70 percent HN03 reagent.
11. Nitric acid, 6M.  Dilute 375 ml of the 70 percent reagent grade
    HN03 to 1 liter with distilled water.
12. Nitric acid, 0.1F1.  Dilute 6 ml of the 70 percent reagent grade
    HN03 to 1 liter with distilled water.
13. Perchloric acid, 12M, 70 percent HC104 reagent.
14. Silver nitrate, crystalline reagent.
15. Silver nitrate, O.lfl.  Dissolve 1.7 g AgNO^ reagent in
    distilled water.  Add 1 ml 6M HN03 and dilute to  100 ml  with
    distilled water.
16. Titanium trichloride, 20 percent reagent grade.
17. Titanium trichloride, 0.4 percent.  Dilute 1 ml of the 20
    percent  T1C13 to 50 ml with 1 K HCl.   Prepare  fresh dally.
18. Tri1sooctylamfne (TIOA), reagent grade.
19. TIOA solutfon fn p-xylene, 10 percent.  Dissolve  100 ml  of
    triisooctylamine in p-xylene and dilute to 1 liter with  p-xylene.
20. p-Xylene, reagent grade.
21. Thorium-234 tracer solution, approximately 800 pCi/ml, accurately
    calibrated.
22. Uranium-232 tracer solution, approximately 1 pCi/ml, accurately
    calibrated.

                             00-07-2

-------
Sample Preparation
     1.  Filter water sample of one to four liters through  a  pleated
         filter.
     2.  Add 50 ml 12M HC1 and measured aliquots of 234Th and 232U
         tracers.
     3.  Evaporate sample to 200 ml volume.
     4.  Add 600 ml of 12M HC1 to make sample concentration 9F4 in HC1.

Uranium Determination
     1.  Place 100 ml of 10 percent TIOA solution in a  1  liter separatory
         funnel.  Add 50 ml 9M HC1 and shake funnel  for one minute.   Drain
         and discard lower aqueous acid phase after clean separation  of
         the two phases.
     2.  Add the aqueous acid sample to the TIOA in the separatory funnel
         and shake the funnel vigorously for two minutes.  Vent the funnel
         stopcock to prevent pressure buildup in the funnel.
     3.  Allow the phases to separate cleanly and draw  off  the lower
         aqueous acid phase.  Save for thorium analysis.
     4.  Add 50 ml 9f1 HC1 to the TIOA solution in the separatory funnel
         and shake for one minute.
     5.  Allow the phases to separate; withdraw and discard lower aqueous
       -• acid phase.
     6.  Repeat steps 4 and 5.
     7.  Strip the uranium from the TIOA solution by adding 100 ml
         0.1M HN03 to the separatory funnel and shaking the funnel for
         two minutes.
     8.  Allow phases to separate; withdraw and save lower  acid phase.
     9.  Repeat steps 7 and 8 and combine strip solutions.  Discard TIOA
         solution.
     10. Place combined strip solutions in the clean separatory funnel.
     11. Add 100 ml p-xylene to combined strip solution and shake funnel
         for one minute.  See Note 3.
                                  00-07-3

-------
12. Allow phases to separate cleanly; withdraw lower aqueous add
    layer Into beaker.  Discard p-xylene.
13. Evaporate combined solution from step  12 to dryness.  Do not
    overheat.
14. Add 100 ml 16M HN03 to residue and  evaporate to dryness.  Do
    not overheat.
15. Add 5 ml 9ri HC1 and 5ml 12M HCIO^ to residue and evaporate  to
    dryness.
16. Repeat step 15.
17. Add 10 ml 12M HC1 and evaporate to  dryness.
18. Repeat step 17.
19. Add 50 ml 1M HC1 to sample residue  and warm gently to dissolve
    residue.
20. Heat sample solution to 80°C with stirring and add 50 mg ascorbic
    acid.  Do not overheat.
21. Suspend clean nickel metal strip into  solution for two  hours  to
    remove polonium.
22. Remove nickel and evaporate solution to dryness.
23. Add 15 ml M HC1 to sample residue and warm to approximately  50°C.
24. Add enough ascorbic acid to reduce iron in the sample,  indicated
    by the disappearance of yellow color.
25. Add 1 ml of 0.4 percent TiClj to reduce uranium.
26. Add 1 ml of lanthanum carrier and 5 ml of 3M HF to precipitate
    LaF, carrying uranium.  Mix well and set aside for 30
    minutes.
27. Using suction, filter coprecipltated sample through a  filter
    membrane.
28. Rinse sample beaker with 10 ml water and add to filter  funnel.
    Rinse beaker with 10 ml etnano! and add to funnel.
29. Remove clamp and top of funnel with suction on.   Allow membrane
    to dry.
                             00-07-4

-------
     30. Mount membrane carefully on 32 mm planchet using double stick
         tape.
     31. Count sample for 1000 minutes on alpha spectrometer.

Thorium Determination
     1.  Evaporate aqueous add fraction containing thorium from step 3 of
         Uranium Determination.
     2.  Add 10 ml 16M HM03 and evaporate to dryness.
     3.  Add 5 ml 9M HC1 and 5 ml 12M HC104 and evaporate to dryness.
     4.  Add 10 ml of 16f1 HNO, and evaporate to dryness.
     5.  Repeat step 4.
     6.  Dissolve sample in 10 ml of 6f1 HIJOj with heat.
     7.  Prepare ion exchange column with 25 ml BioRad AG1X8. resin.   Wash
         resin with 250 ml of 6M HN03.
     8.  Decant sample into column at gravity flow (approx.  3ml/min)  and
         rinse the sample on the column with an additional  50  ml  of 6f1
         HNOj.  Discard wash.
     9.  Elute the thorium from the column with 200 ml of 6M^ HC1  at flow
         rate of 3 ml/minute.
     10. Evaporate thorium eluate to dryness.
     11. Add 10 ml 12M HC1 to residue and evaporate to dryness.
     12. Add 15 ml 1M_ HC1 to sample residue and warm to approximately 50°C.
     13. Add 1 ml lanthanum carrier and 5 ml  of 3M HF. Mix  well  and  set
         aside for 30 minutes.
     14. Using suction, filter copreclpitated sample through a filter
         membrane.
     15. Rinse sample beaker with 10 ml water and add to  filter funnel.
         Rinse beaker with 10 ml ethanol  and add to funnel.
     16. Remove clamp and top of funnel with suction on.   Allow membrane
         to dry.
     17. Mount membrane carefully on 32 mm planchet using double  stick
         tape.
                                 00-07-5

-------
     18.   Beta count the sample to measure  thorlum-234 recovery.
     19.   Count sample for 1000 minutes on  alpha spectrometer.

Calculations
     Calculate the concentration, Z, of uranium In plcocuries per liter as
follows:

                      z _       (A-Aj) x F
where
     E
     F

     V
     T
     2.22
gross sample counts which  appear  In  the uranium-234,-235,
or-238 alpha energy region,
background counts in the same alpha  energy region as A above*
gross tracer counts which  appear  in  the alpha energy region
of the tracer isotope,
background counts in the same alpha  energy region as B_ above,
alpha detector efficiency,
total calibrated tracer counts for same counting time as
sample counts,
sample volume (liters),
counting time (minutes), and
dpm per pCi.
     Calculate the concentration, Z,  of thorium In  picocuries per liter as
follows:

                     ,         (A - A,) x F
                         (2.22HB - BjHEHVHT)
                                 00-07-6

-------
where
     A     =  gross sample counts which appear in the thorium -227, -228,
              -230 or -232 alpha energy region,
     A.     s  background counts in the same alpha energy region as AL above,
     B     =  gross tracer beta counts,
     Bj     8  beta counter background,
     E     8  alpha detector efficiency,
     F     8  total calibrated tracer beta counts,
     V     =  sample volume (liters),
     T     8  counting time (minutes), and
     2.22  8  dpm per pCi.

     Calculate the lower limit of detection (LLD) for thorium in
picocurles per liter as follows:

                               4.66 V CRT
                      LLD
                            (2.22)(E)(R)(W)(T)
where

     CB    =  background count rate,
     T      = counting time (same for sample and background),
     E      = alpha detector efficiency,
     R      = fractional yield based  on B-Bj/F  in calculation,
     Y      = sample volume (liters), and
     2.22  =  dpm per pCi.

     This LLD calculation is valid if the sample counting  time is the same
as the background counting time.
                                 00-07-7

-------
Notes
1.  Nuclepore is a registered trademark of Nuclepore  Corp.,  Pleasanton, CA.
2.  Teflon Is a registered trademark of Dupont,  Co.,  Wilmington, DE.
3.  The p-xylene removes most of the TIOA carried  into  the aqueous acid
    phase.  Residual TIOA makes the coprecipitation step more  difficult.

References
1.  Moore, F.L., "Liquid-Liquid Extraction of Uranium and Plutonium  from
    Hydrochloric acid Solution with Tri (iso-octyl) amine,"  Analytical
    Chemistry 30. 908 (1958).
                                  00-07-8

-------
                  Reproduced by NTIS
±0-0

         «
£ O
 ££
 b 0)
 0) O
 OP =
 _ L..-
£s>IS
Z o.2.£
                  National Technical Information Service
                  Springfield, VA 22161
                          This report was printed specifically for your order
                        from nearly 3 million titles available in our collection.


                  For economy and efficiency, NTIS  does not maintain stock of its vast
                  collection of technical reports.  Rather, most documents' are printed for
                  each order.  Documents that are not in electronic .format are-reproduced
                  from master  archival copies and are the best possible  reproductions
                  available. If you have any questions concerning this document or any
                  order you have placed with NTIS, please call our  Customer Service
                  Department at (703) 487-4660.

                  About NTIS
                  NTIS collects scientific,  technical,  engineering,  and business  related
                  information — then  organizes,  maintains,  and  disseminates  that
                  information in a variety of formats — from microfiche to online sen/ices.
                  The  NTIS collection of nearly 3 million titles includes reports describing
                  research conducted  or sponsored  by federal  agencies  and their
                  contractors;   statistical  and  business  information;   U.S.  military
                  publications;  audiovisual products; computer software and electronic
                  databases developed by federal agencies; training tools; and technical
                  reports prepared by research organizations worldwide.  Approximately
                  100,000 new titles are  added  and indexed  into the  NTIS collection
                  annually.
                      For more information about NTIS products and services, call NTIS
                      at (703) 487-4650 and request the free NTIS Catalog of Products
                           and Services, PR-827LPG, or visit the NTIS Web site
                                         http://www.ntis.gov.
                                               NTIS
                        Your indispensable resource for government-sponsored
                                   information—U.S. and worldwide

-------